All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-
lication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may
be carried out.
This manual applies to all of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to
your specific vehicle.
OOWWNNEERR''SS
MMAANNUUAALL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 1
F2
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions
of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation
of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or
state agencies.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adverse-
ly affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the
radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary meas-
ures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 2
F3
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
✽✽
NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you
or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equip-
ment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 3
F4
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discerning people who
drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of
which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai.It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance
that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please
leave the manual in the vehicle for their use.Thank you.
Copyright 2015 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in
any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor
America.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet Hyundai specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the spec-
ifications listed on Page 8-6 and 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications and consumer information section of the
Owner's Manual.
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 4
F5
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by Hyundai Motor
Company to manufacture vehicles.
They are designed and tested for
the optimum safety, performance,
and reliability to our customers.
2.Why should you use genuine
parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engi-
neered and built to meet rigid man-
ufacturing requirements. Damage
caused by using imitation, counter-
feit or used salvage parts is not
covered under the Hyundai New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any
other Hyundai warranty.
In addition, any damage to or fail-
ure of Hyundai Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
of an imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage part is not covered by any
Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are pur-
chasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts for export
are packaged with labels written
only in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized Hyundai
Dealerships.
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 5
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / Vehicle handling instructions /
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Keys / Door locks / Liftgate (Tailgate) / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel /
Mirrors / Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Multimedia system / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / All Wheel Drive (AWD) / Brake system /
Cruise control system / Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
AN HMA FOREWORD.QXP 2015-05-07 ¿ ¨˜ 4:12 Page 7
1
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Other fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing MMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders . 1-6
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving experience from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways.We strongly
recommend that you read the entire
manual. In order to minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections in the manual. Illustrations
complement the text in this manual to
best explain how to use your vehicle.
By reading your manual, you will
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under
various road conditions. The general
layout of the manual is provided in
the Table of Contents. A good place
to start is the index; it has an alpha-
betical listing of all information in your
manual. Sections: This manual has
eight sections plus an index. Each
section begins with a brief list of con-
tents so you can tell at a glance if that
section has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGS,
CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this
manual.These WARNINGS were pre-
pared to enhance your personal safe-
ty.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommenda-
tions provided in these WARNINGS,
CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
Symbols used in this manual
Warnings, Cautions and Notices
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Safety symbol in illustrations
The symbol means to "Avoid"
or "Do not do something".
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEAD-
ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust
emissions and spark plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended
fuels.)
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than what
has been specified. (Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates that a
condition may result in harm,
serious bodily injury or death if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates that a con-
dition may result in damage to
your vehicle if the caution is
ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling. Attempts to
force more fuel into the tank
can cause fuel overflow onto
you and the ground causing a
risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 2
13
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system, engine con-
trol system and emission control sys-
tem.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1.Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to
the fuel system or any performance
problems caused by the use of “E85”
fuel.
Other fuels
Using fuels such as;
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metallic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause plugging, misfiring,
poor acceleration, engine stalling,
catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 3
Introduction
41
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission
control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any perform-
ance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline, which
help prevent deposit formation in the
engine.These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting their
vehicle or the engine does not run
smoothly, additives that you can buy
separately may be added to the
gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
not available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at every
7,500mile or every engine oil change
is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other addi-
tives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 4
15
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correct-
ly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. It is not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as a conventional 2-wheel
drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure
to read the “Reducing the risk of a
rollover” driving guidelines, in
section 5 of this manual.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Items contained in motor vehi-
cles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compart-
ment components and materi-
als
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, termi-
nals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 5
Introduction
61
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other par-
ties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
AN HMA 1.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ 11:07 Page 6
Exterior overview I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview (I). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Interior overview (II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Panoramic sunroof..................................4-48
2. Front windshield wiper blades ................7-39
3. Outside rearview mirror..........................4-76
4. Door locks...............................................4-21
5. Headlight ................................................7-72
6. Front fog light........................................4-125
7. Hood.......................................................4-42
8.Tires and wheels...........................7- 44 / 8-4
OANNIN2901
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Front view
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 2
23
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Antenna ................................................4-169
2. Defroster...............................................4-134
3. Parking assist system...........................4-114
4. Fuel filler door.........................................4-44
5.Towing hook............................................6-31
6. Rear combination lamp ..........................7-76
7. Rear window wiper blade.......................7-40
8. High mounted stop lamp ........................7-78
9. Rearview camera..................................4-118
OANNIN2900
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
■ Rear view
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
1. Inside door handle ................................4-23
2. Driver position memory system ..............3-8
3. Outside rearview mirror control..............4-76
4. Power window lock button......................4-37
5. Central door lock switch ........................4-23
6. Power window switch ............................4-40
7. Fuel-filler door opener............................4-44
8. Instrument panel illumination
control knob ..........................................4-80
9. DBC button ............................................5-40
10. ESC OFF button ..................................5-35
11. Active ECO button ..............................5-57
12. Heated steering wheel button..............4-56
13. AWD LOCK button ..............................5-22
14. BSD on/off button ................................5-50
15. Steering wheel ....................................4-54
16.Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever..........................................4-55
17. Inner panel fuse ..................................7-60
18. Hood release lever ..............................4-42
19. Seat........................................................3-2
OANNIN3003
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 4
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
OANNIN2006
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Power outlet .....................................4-160
2. Aux, USB and iPod
®
.........................4-163
3. Seat warmer/
Air ventilation seat button ........3-11 / 3-13
4. Parking assist system button...........4-114
5.Transaxle shift lever............................5-14
6. Cup holder........................................4-159
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 5
Your vehicle at a glance
62
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OANNIN2004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Lighting control lever........................4-120
2. Audio remote control buttons...........4-170
3. Bluetooth hands-free
buttons.................................4-205 / 4-337
4. Cruise control button..........................5-46
5. Driver selectable steering
mode button.......................................4-57
6. LCD display control buttons...............4-80
7. Horn ...................................................4-56
8. Driver’s front air bag...........................3-56
9.Wiper and washer control lever........4-126
10. Ignition switch/
Engine start/stop button.............5-6 / 5-9
11. Audio..............................................4-169
12. Hazard warning flasher..................4-119
13. Climate control system ......4-135 / 4-145
14. Passenger’s front air bag .................3-56
15. Glove box .......................................4-156
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 6
27
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ODMEMC2001
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29
2. Engine oil filler cap............................7-26
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-31
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-34
5. Fuse box............................................7-67
6. Negative battery terminal ..................7-41
7. Positive battery terminal....................7-41
8. Radiator cap......................................7-30
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-26
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-33
■ Gasoline 2.4L GDI
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 7
Your vehicle at a glance
82
ODMNMC2033
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir....................7-29
2. Engine oil filler cap............................7-26
3. Brake fluid reservoir ..........................7-31
4. Air cleaner ........................................7-34
5. Fuse box............................................7-67
6. Negative battery terminal ..................7-41
7. Positive battery terminal....................7-41
8. Radiator cap......................................7-30
9. Engine oil dipstick..............................7-26
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir....7-33
■ Gasoline 2.0L TURBO GDI
AN HMA 2.QXP 6/10/2015 11:21 AM Page 8
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• Tether Anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
• Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . 3-43
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
• Do not Install a child restraint on a front
passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
• Occupant classification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
• Main components of occupant classification system 3-51
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
• Side impact air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the
air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
• Additional safety precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
3
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 1
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer* /
Air ventilation seat*
(6) Headrest
Rear seat
(7) Forward and backward*
(8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Headrest
(10) Armrest
(11) Seat warmer*
* if equipped
SEATS
OANNSA2001
* The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 2
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose
objects
Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Do not place anything under the
front seats.
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the
seatback reclined could lead to
serious or fatal injury in an acci-
dent. If a seat is reclined during
an accident, the occupant’s
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt, apply-
ing great force to the unprotect-
ed abdomen. Serious or fatal
internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly
and be sure there are no other
occupants around the seat. If
the seatback is returned with-
out being held and controlled,
the back of the seat could
spring forward resulting in acci-
dental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING
Occupants should never sit on
seat cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident
causing death, serious injury,
or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or col-
lision.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel while maintaining com-
fortable control of the vehicle.
We recommend that your
chest be at least 10 inches
(250 mm) away from the steer-
ing wheel.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 3
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING - Rear
seatbacks
• The rear seatback must be
securely latched. If not, pas-
sengers and objects could be
thrown forward resulting in
serious injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or col-
lision.
• No passenger should ride in
the cargo area or sit or lie on
folded seatbacks while the
vehicle is moving. All passen-
gers must be properly seated
in seats and restrained prop-
erly while riding.
• When resetting the seatback
to the upright position, make
sure it is securely latched by
pushing it forward and rear-
wards.
• To avoid the possibility of
burns, do not remove the car-
pet in the cargo area.Emission
control devices beneath this
floor generate high tempera-
tures.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Luggage and other cargo
should be laid flat in the cargo
area or on the folded rear
seatback. If objects are large,
heavy, or must be piled, they
must be secured. Under no
circumstances should cargo
be piled higher than the seat-
backs. Failure to follow these
warnings could result in seri-
ous injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop, colli-
sion or rollover.
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked
into place by attempting to
move the seat forward or
reverse without using the lock
release lever. Sudden or unex-
pected movement of the dri-
ver's seat could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle
resulting in an accident.
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not place a cigarette
lighter on the floor or seat.
When you operate the seat,
gas may exit out of the lighter
and cause a fire.
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between
the seat and the center con-
sole.Your hands might be cut
or injured by the sharp edges
of the seats mechanism.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 4
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment - Manual
(if equipped)
Forward and rearward
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1.Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and rear-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat) (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat
cushion, push the lever upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
OANNSA2007
OANNSA2008
OANNSA2009
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 5
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
1.Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control knobs located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so as to easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
OANNSA2010
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted. Excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary battery drain,
don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while
the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control knobs at the
same time. Doing so may result
in power seat motor or electri-
cal component malfunction.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 6
37
Safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward
1. Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seatback angle
1. Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Seat height (for driver’s seat)
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion.
Pull the rear portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the rear part of the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
OANNSA2013
OANNSA2011 OANNSA2012
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the switch.
1. Press the front portion (1) of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion (2) of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches
the desired position.
3. Press the upper portion (3) of the
switch to move the support position
up, or press the lower portion (4) of
the switch, to move the support
position down.
4. Release the switch once it reaches
the desired position.
Driver position memory system
(for power seat, if equipped)
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat and outside rearview mirror
position with a simple button opera-
tion. By saving the desired position
into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the posi-
tion memory will be erased and the
driving position should be restored in
the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N
while the engine start/stop button
is ON or ignition switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-
side rearview mirror to a position
that is comfortable for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel.The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button.The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
OANNSA2014 ODM043335N
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 8
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P or N
while the engine start/stop button
is ON or ignition switch ON.
2.To recall the position in the memo-
ry, press the desired memory but-
ton (1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the OFF
position and front driver’s door is
opened.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
section 4.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps to protect the head and
neck in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Use caution when recalling the
adjustment memory while sit-
ting in the vehicle. Push the
seat position control switch to
the desired position immediate-
ly if the seat moves too far in
any direction.
OLM039303N
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 9
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to the backwards position, press
and hold the release button (1), and
adjust position of the headrest.
Adjust the headrest so that it proper-
ly supports the head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
WARNING - Headrest
adjustment
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is simi-
lar with the height of the top of
their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as
close to your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed.Severe
injury to an occupant may
occur in the event of an acci-
dent. Headrests may provide
protection against severe neck
injuries when properly adjust-
ed.
• Do not adjust the headrest
position of the driver's seat
while the vehicle is in motion.
OANNSA2015 OANNSA2016
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 10
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Removal and reinstallation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button using a
simple tool (1) while pulling the
headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes.
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
OANNSA2017
OANNSA2018
OANNSA2019
■ Type A
■ Type B
OYFH034205
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback
towards the front with the head-
rest and seat cushion raised,
the headrest may come in con-
tact with the sunvisor or other
parts of the vehicle.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 11
Safety features of your vehicle
123
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automati-
cally depending on the seat tem-
perature.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Never allow passengers who
may not be able to take care of
themselves to be exposed to
the risk of seat warmer burns.
These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 12
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The Air ventilation seat is provided to
cool the front seats during hot weath-
er by blowing air through small vent
holes on the surface of the seats.
While the engine is running, press
the cooling portion (blue color) of the
switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat.
When the operation of the seat cool-
er is not needed, keep the switches
in the OFF position.
• Each time you press the button, the
airflow will change as follows:
• The Air ventilation seat defaults to
the OFF position whenever the igni-
tion switch is turned on.
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
OANNSA2020
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OCM030052
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash.Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the
occupant sensing system.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 13
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Rear seat adjustment
Forward and backward
(if equipped)
To move the seat forward or backward:
1.Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seat-
back of the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.(The
lever MUST return to its original
position for the seatback to lock.)
OANNSA2021
WARNING
For proper operation of the
occupant classification system:
• Do not place any items cumu-
latively weighing over 2.2 lbs
(1 kg) in the seatback pocket
or on the seat.
OANNSA2022
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 14
315
Safety features of your vehicle
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps to
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
OLM039304N
WARNING - Headrest
adjustment
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the head-
rest should be adjusted so the
middle of the headrest is at the
same height as the center of
gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravi-
ty of most people's head is
similar with the height of the
top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as
close to your head as possi-
ble. For this reason, the use of
a cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback is not
recommended.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Severe injury to an occupant
may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may pro-
vide protection against severe
neck injuries when properly
adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 15
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and reinstallation
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
OANNSA2024 OANNSA2025
WARNING
• Make sure the headrest locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occu-
pants.
• After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed
in the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash
injury during rear impact.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 16
317
Safety features of your vehicle
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Seat warmer
(for rear seat, if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the rear seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm rear seats.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
• With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automati-
cally depending on the seat tem-
perature.
OANNSA2028
ODM032026
OFF → HIGH( ) → LOW( )
→
CAUTION
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as thinner, benzene,
alcohol and gasoline. Doing
so may damage the surface of
the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers while the seat warmer
is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 17
Safety features of your vehicle
183
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2.Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
WARNING - Seat warmer
burns
Never allow passengers who
may not be able to take care of
themselves to be exposed to
the risk of seat warmer burns.
These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
WARNING
• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. Doing
this could allow cargo to slide
forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
ODM032027
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 18
319
Safety features of your vehicle
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever,
then fold the seat toward the front
of the vehicle.When you return the
seatback to its upright position,
always be sure it has locked into
position by pushing on the top of
the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
Rear seat folding from the liftgate
(tailgate) area (if equipped)
Pull the rear seat back folding lever out.
The rear seat back will be folded.
If you pull the left side lever (1) out, left
side seat back and center seat back
will be folded.
If you pull the right side lever (2) out,
right side seat back will be folded.
OANNSA2026 OANNSA2027
OANNSA2029
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 19
Safety features of your vehicle
203
To fold down the rear center seat-
back
1. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2. Push the center seatback folding
lever up, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
WARNING - Rear seat
folding
Do not attempt to fold the rear
seats if the seat is occupied
with other passengers, pets, or
luggage. Injury or damage to
persons, pets, or luggage may
occur.
OANNSA2030
WARNING - Rear center
seat folding
The rear center seat back does
not lock in place when folded
down. When carrying long
objects with the rear center seat
back folded, make sure to
secure the object to prevent it
from being thrown about the
vehicle in a collision. Failure to
do so may cause injury to vehi-
cle occupants.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 20
321
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
When you return the rear seat-
back to its upright position after
being folded down:
Be careful not to damage the
seat belt webbing or buckle. Do
not allow the seat belt webbing
or buckle to get caught or
pinched in the rear seat.
Ensure that the seatback is com-
pletely locked into its upright
position by pushing on the top
of the seatback. Otherwise, in an
accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger
compartment, which could
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION - Rear seat
belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback
to its upright position, hold the
seatback and return it slowly. If
the seatback is returned with-
out holding it, the back of the
seat could spring forward
resulting in injury caused by
being struck by the seatback.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P
(Park) and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from being thrown
about the vehicle in a collision
and causing injury to the vehicle
occupants. Special care of
objects should be taken when
placing them in the rear seats,
since those may hit the front seat
occupants in a frontal collision.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 21
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Seat belt restraint system
SEAT BELTS
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as appli-
cable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted
as firmly as possible, consis-
tent with comfort, to provide the
protection for which they have
been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce
the protection afforded to the
occupant.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can
cause serious injuries in a
crash. The shoulder belt
should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Avoid wearing twisted seat
belts. A twisted belt can't do
its job as well. In a collision, it
could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is
straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the
belt webbing or hardware. If
the belt webbing or hardware
is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
• For maximum restraint sys-
tem protection, the seat belts
must always be used whenev-
er the car is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he/she must
be properly belted and the
seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 22
323
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate to the follow-
ing table when the ignition switch is
in "ON" position.
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt,
be careful not to latch the seat
belt in the buckles of another.
It's very dangerous and you
may not be protected by the
seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt
and do not fasten and unfas-
ten the seat belt repeatedly
while driving.This could result
in loss of control, and an acci-
dent causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle. The seat belt may
not be fastened securely.
1GQA2083
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid
contamination of the webbing
with polishes, oils and chemi-
cals and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be
carried out using mild soap and
water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or dam-
aged. It is essential to replace
the entire assembly after it has
been worn in a severe impact
even if damage to the assembly
is not obvious. Belts should not
be worn with straps twisted.
Each seat belt assembly must
only be used by one occupant;
it is dangerous to put a belt
around a child being carried on
the occupant's lap.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 23
Safety features of your vehicle
243
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 24
325
Safety features of your vehicle
Height adjustment (Front)
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of 4 positions
for maximum comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt
anchor is locked into position
at the appropriate height.
Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious
injuries in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts
after an accident could leave
you with damaged seat belts
that will not provide protec-
tion in the event of another
collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your
seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
OCM030026
Front seat
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt
portion as low as possible and
snugly across your hips, not on
your waist.If the lap belt is locat-
ed too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in
the event of a collision. Both
arms should not be under or
over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as
shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under
the arm nearest the door.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 25
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat positions
to help accommodate the installation
of child restraint systems. Although a
combination retractor is also installed
in the front passenger seat position, it
is strongly recommended that children
always be seated in the rear seat.
NEVER place any infant restraint sys-
tem in the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of
the seat belt is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
ODM032051
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 26
327
Safety features of your vehicle
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) in the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts can be
activated, where the frontal collision
is severe enough, together with the
air bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-
vate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions. (for passenger’s side)
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner system
activates, the load limiter inside the
retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
B210A01NF-1/H
OANNSA2023
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 27
Safety features of your vehicle
283
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4.Emergency fastening device (EFD)
WARNING
• Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near
the buckle may increase the
risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
• For your safety, be sure that
the belt webbing is not loose
or twisted and always sit
properly on your seat.
ODMESA2024
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit
from a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1.The seat belt must be worn
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read
and follow all of the important
information and precautions
about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including
seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts
properly.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 28
329
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner
system may be activated not only
in certain frontal collision but also
in certain side collision or rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro-
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tension-
er seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate only one time. After
activation, pre-tensioner seat
belts must be replaced. All
seat belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a colli-
sion.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms
become hot during activation.
Do not touch the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies for
several minutes after they
have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
(Continued)
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt
system are not working proper-
ly, this warning light will illumi-
nate even if there is no malfunc-
tion of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illumi-
nating for approximately 6 sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belt and SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 29
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint laws.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat.
For more information about the use of
these restraints, refer to “Child
restraint system” in this section.
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assem-
blies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, replace, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inad-
vertent activation and serious
injury.
• Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded,
contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle
must wear their seat belts at all
times. Seat belts and child
restraints reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries for all
occupants in the event of a col-
lision or sudden stop.Without a
seat belt, occupants could be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior struc-
ture or be thrown from the vehi-
cle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Even with advanced air bags,
unbelted occupants can be
severely injured by a deploying
air bag.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant seating contained in
this manual.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle
needs to be properly restrained
at all times, including infants
and children. Never hold a child
in your arms or lap when riding
in a vehicle. The violent forces
created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the inte-
rior. Always use a child restraint
appropriate for your child's
height and weight.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 30
331
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat
by a child restraint system that
meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened snug on
the hips and as low as possible.
Check belt fit periodically. A child's
squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the
most safety in the event of an acci-
dent when they are restrained by a
proper restraint system in the rear
seat. If a larger child (over age 12)
must be seated in the front seat, the
child should be securely restrained
by the available lap/shoulder belt and
the seat should be placed in the rear-
most position. Children age 12 and
under should be restrained securely
in the rear seat.NEVER place a child
age 12 and under in the front seat.
NEVER place a rear facing child seat
in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to a child restraint sys-
tem.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
• If seat belts are not properly
worn and adjusted on chil-
dren,there is a risk of death or
serious injury.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 31
Safety features of your vehicle
323
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recom-
mended for pregnant women to
lessen the chance of injury in an
accident. When a seat belt is used,
the lap belt portion should be placed
as low and snugly as possible on the
hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper pro-
tection if the person is lying down in
the rear seat or if the seats are in a
reclined position.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the
safety belt over the area of the
abdomen where the unborn
child is located or above the
abdomen where the belt could
seriously injure or even cause
the death of the unborn child
during an impact.
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of seri-
ous or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
The protection of your restraint
system (seat belts and air bags)
is greatly reduced by reclining
your seat. Seat belts must be
snug against your hips and
chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined,
the greater the chance that an
occupant's hips will slide under
the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occu-
pant's neck could strike the
shoulder belt. Drivers and pas-
sengers should always sit well
back in their seats, properly
belted, and with the seatbacks
upright.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 32
333
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry.If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an acci-
dent.This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional ques-
tions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Pinched
seat belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 33
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children not in a child restraint
should use one of the seat belts pro-
vided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by lap
belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-
tem (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WARNING
• A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. Should an accident
occur and cause the passen-
ger-side air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat.Thus only
use a child restraint in the
rear seat of your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A seat belt or child restraint
system can become very hot
if it is left in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day, even if the
outside temperature does not
feel hot. Be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
• When the child restraint sys-
tem is not in use, store it in
the luggage area or fasten it
with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in the
case of a sudden stop or an
accident.
• Children may be seriously
injured or killed by an inflating
air bag. All children, even
those too large for child
restraints, must ride in the
rear seat.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 34
335
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be force-
fully struck by an inflating air
bag resulting in serious or
fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufactur-
er’s instructions for installation
and use of the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child
seat is secured properly in the
car and your child is securely
restrained in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a
vehicle.The violent forces cre-
ated during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and
throw the child against the
car’s interior.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never put a seat belt over
yourself and a child. During a
crash, the belt could press
deep into the child causing
serious internal injuries.
• Never leave children unat-
tended in a vehicle – not even
for a short time. The car can
heat up very quickly, resulting
in serious injuries to children
inside. Even very young chil-
dren may inadvertently cause
the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or
lock themselves or others
inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or
any two persons, to use the
same seat belt.
• Children often squirm and
reposition themselves improp-
erly. Never let a child ride with
the shoulder belt under their
arm or behind their back.
Always properly position and
secure children in the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow a child to stand-
up or kneel on the seat or floor
of a moving vehicle. During a
collision or sudden stop, the
child can be violently thrown
against the vehicle’s interior,
resulting in serious injury.
• Never use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very
hot, especially when the car is
parked in direct sunlight.
Always check seat belt buck-
les before fastening them
over a child.
• After an accident, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
check the child restraint sys-
tem, seat belt, tether anchor
and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint sys-
tem because of the driver's
seat, install the child restraint
system in the rear right seat.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 35
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use
of a child seat or infant seat is required.
This child seat or infant seat should be
of appropriate size for the child and
should be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the automatic lock-
ing mode to secure a child restraint.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously
injured or killed in a collision if
the child restraint is not prop-
erly anchored to the vehicle
and the child is not properly
restrained in the child restraint.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Before installing the child
restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manu-
facturer.
• If the seat belt does not oper-
ate as described in this sec-
tion, have the system checked
immediately by your author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint systems and
the instructions provided with
the child restraint system
could increase the chance
and/or severity of injury in an
accident.
• If the vehicle headrest pre-
vents proper installation of a
child seat, the headrest of the
respective seating position
shall be readjusted or entirely
removed.
WARNING
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that
an inflating passenger-side air
bag could impact the rear-facing
child restraint and kill the child.
CRS09
OANNSA2032
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 36
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the automatic locking mode
The automatic locking mode will help
prevent the normal movement of the
child in the vehicle from causing the
seat belt to loosen and compromise
the child restraint system. To secure
a child restraint system, use the fol-
lowing procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder
belt around or through the restraint,
following the restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions. Be sure the seat
belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out.When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Automatic locking”
(child restraint) mode.
OMD030054A
OMD030053A
E2MS103005
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 37
Safety features of your vehicle
383
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking”or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “automatic lock-
ing” mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Automatic locking” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the
“Automatic locking” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
OMD030056A
OMD030055A
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 38
339
Safety features of your vehicle
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Automatic lock-
ing” mode to the emergency lock
mode for normal adult usage.
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hooks are located on
the rear of the seat back.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether
anchor.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is equipped with the
tether anchor type B, the hooks may
be under the luggage mat. Take out
the hooks through the slit of the lug-
gage mat.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
WARNING - Automatic
locking mode
The lap/shoulder belt automati-
cally returns to the “emergency
lock mode” whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each
time a child restraint is installed.
If the retractor is not in the
Automatic Locking mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops sud-
denly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly
anchored to the car, including
setting the retractor to the
Automatic Locking mode.
OANNSA2031
OANNSA2033
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 39
Safety features of your vehicle
403
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
anchor or to a single lower
anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats
may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break,
causing serious injury or death.
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the
child restraint is not properly
anchored to the car and the
child is not properly restrained
in the child restraint. Always fol-
low the child seat manufactur-
er’s instructions for installation
and use.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"Tether Anchor" system to
install a child restraint system
in the rear seat, all unused
vehicle rear seat belt metal
latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat
belt buckles and the seat belt
webbing must be retracted
behind the child restraint to
prevent the child from reaching
and taking hold of unretracted
seat belts. Unlatched metal
latch plates or tabs may allow
the child to reach the unretract-
ed seat belts which may result
in strangulation and a serious
injury or death to the child in
the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the lower anchors.
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or
serious injury.
WARNING - Child restraint
anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached some-
where other than the correct
tether anchor.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 40
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle.This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints.
OLM039035
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
WARNING
Do not place anything around
the lower anchors. Also make
sure that the seat belt is not
caught in the lower anchors.
ODM032038
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 41
Safety features of your vehicle
423
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustration.
There is no LATCH anchor provided
for the center rear seating position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
✽✽
NOTICE
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb
(30 kg).
How to calculate the child restraint
weight :
Child restraint weight =
65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
WARNING
If the child restraint is not
anchored properly, the risk of a
child being seriously injured or
killed in a collision greatly
increases.
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
LATCH lower anchors are only
to be used with the left and right
rear outboard seating positions.
Never attempt to attach a LATCH
equipped seat in the center
seating position. You may dam-
age the anchors or the anchors
may fail and break in a collision.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt
webbing to get scratched or
pinched by the child-seat latch
and LATCH anchor during the
installation.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 42
343
Safety features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side impact air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
(5) Driver’s knee air bag
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers must
always wear the seat belts pro-
vided in order to minimize the
risk and severity of injury in the
event of a collision or rollover.
OANNSA2035
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 43
Safety features of your vehicle
443
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or
START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of serious
frontal or side collision in order to
help protect the occupants from
serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate by the severity of a collision
and its direction. These two factors
determine whether the sensors
send out an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle hits in
the collision.Though, factors are not
limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, side
and/or curtain airbags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.The
speed of air bag inflation is a con-
sequence of the extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the vehi-
cle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures.
This speed of inflation reduces the
risk of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises and
broken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-
cially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying
air bags in a collision, the driv-
er should sit as far back from
the steering wheel air bag as
possible (at least 10 inches
(250 mm) away).The front pas-
sengers should always move
their seats as far back as pos-
sible and sit back in their seat.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 44
345
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After the
air bag inflates, you may feel substan-
tial discomfort in breathing due to the
contact of your chest with both the
seat belt and the air bag, as well as
from breathing the smoke and powder.
Open your doors and/or windows
as soon as possible after impact in
order to reduce discomfort and pre-
vent prolonged exposure to the
smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are
non-toxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc).If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
WARNING - Hot
components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
(Continued)
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passen-
gers may be injured by the air
bag expansion force if they are
not in proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally include
facial or bodily abrasions,
injuries from broken glasses or
burns by the air bag inflation
gasses.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 45
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your airbag system, which includes
side and/or curtain airbags used for
rollover protection.
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side impact air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could cause seri-
ous injury or death to an infant
or child.
OLM039302N/Q
,
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 46
347
Safety features of your vehicle
10. PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
(Front passenger’s seat only)
11. Occupant classification system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
14. Driver’s knee air bag module
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " "
on the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, after which the SRS air bag
warning light " " should go out.
W7-147
WARNING
If any of the following condi-
tions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the SRS. Have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on
briefly when you turn the igni-
tion ON.
• The light stays on after illumi-
nating for approximately 6
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the igni-
tion switch is in ON position.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 47
Safety features of your vehicle
483
The front air bag modules are located
in the center of the steering wheel, in
the front passenger's panel above the
glove box and in the driver’s side
knee bolster. When the SRSCM
detects a sufficiently severe impact to
the front of the vehicle, it will auto-
matically deploy the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
OHM039103N
Driver’s front air bag (2)
OHM039102N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
OHM039104N
Driver’s front air bag (3)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 48
349
Safety features of your vehicle
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
• Do not install or place any
accessories (drink holder, CD
or discs holder, sticker, etc.)
on the front passenger's
panel above the glove box in a
vehicle with a passenger's air
bag. Such objects may
become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the
passenger's air bag inflates.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When installing a container of
liquid air freshener inside the
vehicle, do not place it near
the instrument cluster nor on
the instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous
projectile and cause injury if
the passenger's air bag
inflates.
WARNING
• If an air bag deploys, there
may be a loud noise followed
by a fine dust released in the
vehicle. These conditions are
normal and are not hazardous
- the air bags are packed in
this fine powder.The dust gen-
erated during air bag deploy-
ment may cause skin or eye
irritation as well as aggravate
asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with luke-
warm water and a mild soap
after an accident in which the
air bags were deployed.
• The SRS can function only
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 49
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system
is designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated front passenger
and determine if the passenger's
front air bag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not. The driver's front air
bag is not affected or controlled by
the occupant classification system.
(Continued)
If the SRS air bag warning light
" " does not illuminate, or
continuously remains on after
illuminating for about 6 sec-
onds or blinks when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driv-
ing, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have
your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Before you replace a fuse or
disconnect a battery terminal,
turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position and remove
the ignition key for ignition
key, and turn the engine
start/stop button to the OFF
position for smart key. Never
remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON posi-
tion. Failure to heed this warn-
ing will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
OANNSA2003/OANNSA2002/OANNSA2004
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type C
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 50
351
Safety features of your vehicle
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the front passenger air
bag system should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
indicating the front passenger air
bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indi-
cator light is interconnected with
the occupant classification system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of adult size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
indicator will be turned off and the
front passenger's air bag will be able
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal
crashes.
You will find the PASS AIR BAG
"OFF" indicator on the center facia
panel.This system detects the condi-
tions 1~4 in the following table and
activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person's legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function proper-
ly if the passenger takes actions
which can affect the classification
system.These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
tion.
(2) Leaning against the door or
center console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other loca-
tions which reduce the passen-
ger weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 51
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification
system
*1) The system judges a person of
adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child
depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat.When a
larger child who has outgrown a
child restraint system sits in the
front passenger seat, the system
may recognize him/her as an
adult depending upon his/her
physique or sitting position.
*3) Never install a child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indi-
cator may turn on or off when a
child above 12 months to 12
years old (with or without child
restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal
condition.
WARNING - OCS system
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the occupant
classification system (OCS) and
may result in the deactivation of
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
PASS AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator light
SRS
warning light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult *
1
or child age 13 and up*
2
Off Off Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 52
353
Safety features of your vehicle
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load, an
active electronic device or
blanket in the front passenger
seat or seatback pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OHG031073A
- Never sit on the front passen-
ger seat with anything attached
such as a blanket or cushion.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 53
Safety features of your vehicle
543
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASS AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK or OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position.This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indicator
is still on, ask the passenger to move
to the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
The PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indica-
tor illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
B990A01O
Proper position
WARNING
Do not hang onto the front pas-
senger seat. Do not hang any
items, such as a seatback table
or entertainment system, on the
front passenger seatback. Do
not place feet on the front pas-
senger seatback. Do not place
any items under the front pas-
senger seat. Any of these could
interfere with proper sensor
operation.
WARNING - AIR BAG
"OFF" light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
is illuminated, because the air
bag will not deploy in the event
of a crash. The driver must
instruct the passenger to repo-
sition himself in the seat.
Failure to properly position
yourself may lead to airbag
deactivation resulting in airbag
non-deployment in a collision. If
the PASS AIR BAG “OFF” indi-
cator remains illuminated after
the passenger repositions
themselves properly and the
vehicle is restarted, it is recom-
mended the passenger move to
the rear seat because the pas-
senger's front air bag will not
deploy.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 54
355
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
classification system, never
install a child restraint system
in the front passenger's seat.
A deploying air bag can force-
fully strike a child resulting in
serious injuries or death. Any
child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children
too large for child restraints
should use the available
lap/shoulder belts. No matter
what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
indicator is illuminated when
the front passenger's seat is
occupied by an adult and
he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in
an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor), have that person sit in
the rear seat.
• Do not modify or replace the
front passenger seat. Don't
place anything on or attach
anything such as a blanket or
seat heater to the front pas-
senger seat.This can adverse-
ly affect the occupant classifi-
cation system.
• Do not sit on sharp objects
such as tools when occupying
the front passenger seat. This
can adversely affect the occu-
pant classification system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat
covers on the front seats.
• Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear, as
opposed to the front seat. It is
recommended that child
restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding
in a rear-facing infant seat, a
child riding in a forward-fac-
ing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
• Air bags can only be used
once – have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the
air bag immediately after
deployment.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 55
Safety features of your vehicle
563
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
WARNING
If the occupant classification
system is not working properly,
the SRS air bag warning light
on the instrument panel will illu-
minate because the passenger's
front air bag is connected with
the occupant classification sys-
tem. If there is a malfunction of
the occupant classification sys-
tem, the PASS AIR BAG "OFF"
indicator will not illuminate and
the passenger's front air bag
will inflate in frontal impact
crashes even if there is no occu-
pant in the front passenger's
seat. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, remains illumi-
nated after approximately 6 sec-
onds or blinks when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion, or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the occupant classifica-
tion system and the SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
(Continued)
• A smaller-stature adult in the
front passenger’ seat who is
not seated correctly (for exam-
ple: seat excessively reclined,
leaning on the door or center
console, or hips shifted for-
ward in the seat) can cause a
condition where the occupant
classification system senses
less weight than if the occu-
pant were seated properly (sit-
ting upright with the seatback
in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs com-
fortably extended and their
feet on the floor).
This condition can result in an
adult potentially being mis-
classified as a child and illu-
mination of the PASS AIR BAG
"OFF" indicator.
ODM032040/ODM032041/ODM032042
■ Driver’s knee air bag
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 56
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag)
System and the lap/shoulder belts at
both the driver and passenger seat-
ing positions.
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel, on the knee
bolster below the steering wheel col-
umn and the passenger's side front
panel pad above the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel , in the
knee bolster below the steering
wheel column and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control
the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation within
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant classification sys-
tem in the front passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger
in the front passenger's seat and will
turn off the front passenger's air bag
under certain conditions. For more
detail, see "Occupant classification
system" in this section.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 57
Safety features of your vehicle
583
✽✽
NOTICE
• Be sure to read information about
the SRS on the labels provided on
the sun visor.
• Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to
help provide enhanced occupant
protection in frontal crashes.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in collisions in which pro-
tection can be provided by the pre-
tensioner seat belt.
WARNING
If you are considering modifica-
tion of your vehicle due to a dis-
ability, please contact the
Hyundai Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-633-5151.
WARNING
Do not place any objects under-
neath the front seats as they
could interfere with the occu-
pant classification system.
WARNING
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every
time, everyone! Air bags inflate
with considerable force and in
the blink of an eye. Seat belts
help keep occupants in proper
position to obtain maximum
benefit from the air bag. Even
with advanced air bags, improp-
erly and unbelted occupants
can be severely injured when
the air bag inflates.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.To reduce the chance of
serious or fatal injuries and
receive the maximum safety ben-
efit from your restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child
or booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children
in the back seat.It is the safest
place for children of any age
to ride.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 58
359
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning
light remains illuminated while
the vehicle is being driven,
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the air bag sys-
tem as soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used once
– have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag
immediately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when
frontal impact is sufficiently
severe and when the impact
angle is toward from the for-
ward longitudinal axis of the
vehicle. Additionally, the air
bags will only deploy once.
Seat belts must be worn at all
times.
• Front air bags are not intended
to deploy in side-impact, rear-
impact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm
if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to deploy.
• Never place covers, blankets
or seat warmers on the pas-
senger seat as these may
interfere with the occupant
classification system.
• Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment
of the air bags or by rendering
the SRS inoperative.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Front and side air bags can
injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air
bags, while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
• You and your passengers
should never sit or lean unnec-
essarily close to the air bags.
Improperly positioned driver
and passengers can be severe-
ly injured by inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in
an upright position.
• Do not allow a passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
PASS AIR BAG "OFF" indica-
tor is illuminated, because the
air bag will not deploy in the
event of a moderate or severe
frontal crash.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 59
Safety features of your vehicle
603
(Continued)
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an
occupant is out of position
because of not wearing a seat
belt, the air bag may forcefully
contact the occupant causing
serious or fatal injuries.
(Continued)
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
classification system, do not
install a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat
position. A child restraint sys-
tem must never be placed in
the front seat. The infant or
child could be severely injured
or killed by an air bag deploy-
ment in case of an accident.
• Children age 12 and under
must always be properly
restrained in the rear seat.
Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat. If a
child over 12 must be seated
in the front seat, he or she
must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• For maximum safety protec-
tion in all types of crashes, all
occupants including the driver
should always wear their seat
belts whether or not an air bag
is also provided at their seat-
ing position to minimize the
risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash. Do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the air bag while the vehicle
is in motion.
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on
the seat cushion with their
seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 60
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Side impact air bag
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-
senger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy during certain
side-impact collisions, depending on
the crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact. However, when side
deployment threshold is satisfied at
front-impact, side air bags may
deploy. The side impact air bags are
not designed to deploy in all side
impact situations.
The side impact air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact but
also on the opposite side.
The side and/or curtain airbags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
WARNING
Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passen-
gers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is sup-
plemental to the driver's and
the passenger's seat belt sys-
tems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat
belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in motion.
The air bags deploy only in
certain side impact conditions
severe enough to cause sig-
nificant injury to the vehicle
occupants.
• For best protection from the
side impact air bag system
and to avoid being injured by
the deploying side impact air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright posi-
tion with the seat belt properly
fastened. The driver's hands
should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00
positions. The passenger's
arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
(Continued)
ODM032043
OHM032071
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 61
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Curtain air bag
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
(Continued)
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers.
• Use of seat covers could
reduce or prevent the effec-
tiveness of the system.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bag.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between
the front door and the front
seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if the supple-
mental side air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deploy-
ment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal
injury, avoid impact to the side
impact sensor when the igni-
tion switch is on.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
because your vehicle is
equipped with side impact air
bags and an occupant classi-
fication system.
OANNSA2036
OHM032072
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:09 PM Page 62
363
Safety features of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
However, when side deployment
threshold is satisfied at front-
impact, curtain air bags may
deploy.
• The curtain air bags do not only
deploy on the side of the impact
but also on the opposite side.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers
to lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with
side and/or curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side cur-
tain air bag system. This
should only be done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above
instructions can result in injury
or death to the vehicle occu-
pants in an accident.
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain
air bags to provide the best
protection, front seat occu-
pants and outboard rear occu-
pants should sit in an upright
position with the seat belts
properly fastened.
Importantly, children should
sit in a proper child restraint
system in the rear seat.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system. Make
sure to put the child restraint
system as far away from the
door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint sys-
tem in a locked position.
(Continued)
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 63
Safety features of your vehicle
643
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module /
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side impact sensor
ODM032044/OANNSA2037/ODM032046/OANNSA2038/ODM032048
1
2
3 4
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 64
365
Safety features of your vehicle
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the front
bumper, body or C pillars or front
door where side collision sensors
are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed to
absorb impact and deploy the air
bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or side
steppers or replacing a bumper
with non-genuine parts may
adversely affect your vehicle’s col-
lision and air bag deployment per-
formance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
WARNING - Air bag
sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1VQA2084
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 65
Safety features of your vehicle
663
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-
fer from the illustration.
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Also, the side impact and curtain air
bags are designed to inflate when a
rollover is detected by the rollover sen-
sor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
front, knee and front passenger’s air
bags) are designed to inflate in frontal
collisions, they also may inflate in
other types of collisions if the front
impact sensors detect a sufficient
frontal force in another type of impact.
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in certain side
impact collisions. They may inflate in
other type of collisions where a side
force is detected by the sensors.
Side airbag and/or curtain airbags
may also inflate where rollover sen-
sors indicate the possibility of a
rollover occurring (even if none actual-
ly occurs) or in other situations, inclu-
iding when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain airbags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, howev-
er, they will deploy to prevent ejection
of occupants, especially those who
are restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle traf-
fic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OVQ036018N
OHM032072
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 66
367
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
However, side impact and curtain
air bags may inflate depending on
the intensity, vehicle speed and
angles of impact.
OVQ036018NOUN036087
1VQA2086
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 67
Safety features of your vehicle
683
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any addition-
al benefit, and thus the SRS may
not deploy any air bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
forces that are detected by sensors
may be reduced by such “under-
ride” collisions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents where the SRSCM
indicates that the front air bag
deployment would not provide addi-
tional occupant protection.
1VQA20901VQA2089 1VQA2091
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 68
369
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as util-
ity poles or trees.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light " " does not
illuminate, when you turn the ignition
on, or continuously remains on, have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger's panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.
To clean the air bag pad covers, use
only a soft, dry cloth or one which has
been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
WARNING
• Modification to SRS compo-
nents or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifica-
tions to the body structure,
can adversely affect SRS per-
formance and lead to possible
injury.
• Not only the modification of
the parts where the SRS sen-
sors are but also the modifica-
tion of other parts of the vehi-
cle may affect the SRS per-
formance and lead to possible
injury.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag mod-
ules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm
if the vehicle is in a crash
severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
1VQA2092
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 69
Safety features of your vehicle
703
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer knows
these precautions and can give you
the necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat. All occupants
should sit upright, fully back in their
seats with their seat belts on and
their feet on the floor.
• Passengers should not move
out of or change seats while the
vehicle is moving. A passenger
who is not wearing a seat belt dur-
ing a crash or emergency stop can
be thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other occupants,
or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more
than one person uses the same
seat belt, they could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on
seat belts. Devices claiming to
improve occupant comfort or repo-
sition the seat belt can reduce the
protection provided by the seat belt
and increase the chance of serious
injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place
hard or sharp objects between
themselves and the air bags.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on
your lap or in your mouth can result
in injuries if an air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on
the floor. If occupants are too close
to the air bag covers, they could be
injured if the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects
on or near the air bag covers.
Any object attached to or placed
on the front or side air bag covers
could interfere with the proper
operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the
supplemental restraint system sens-
ing components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the
front seats. Placing items under
the front seats could interfere with
the operation of the supplemental
restraint system sensing compo-
nents and wiring harnesses.
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they
must be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other
components of the SRS sys-
tem. Doing so could result in
injury, due to accidental infla-
tion of the air bags or by ren-
dering the SRS inoperative.
• If your car was flooded and
has soaked carpeting or water
on the flooring, you shouldn't
try to start the engine; have
the car towed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 70
371
Safety features of your vehicle
• Never hold an infant or child on
your lap. The infant or child could
be seriously injured or killed in the
event of a crash.All infants and chil-
dren should be properly restrained
in appropriate child safety seats or
seat belts in the rear seat.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the oper-
ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
tem.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and pas-
sengers of potential risks of the air
bag system.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can cause occupants
to be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle resulting in
serious injury or death.
• Always sit upright with the
seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat
cushion with your seat belt
on, legs comfortably extended
and your feet on the floor.
• Be careful not to cause impact
to the doors when the ignition
is ON.The air bags may inflate.
OANNSA2006
■ Front
ODM032057
■ Side
AN HMA 3.QXP 3/5/2015 3:10 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• From outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• From inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Liftgate (Tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Non - powered liftgate (tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
• Power liftgate (Power tailgate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Smart liftgate (Smart tailgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Emergency liftgate (tailgate) safety release . . . . . . . 4-36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Opening the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Closing the fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Emergency fuel filler door release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Driver selectable steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
• Blind zone mirror (BZM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
• Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Headlamp delay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Windshield wipers (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
• Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
• Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
4
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 2
• Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-133
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• Refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Air Conditioning refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
• Multi box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Luggage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Aux, USB and iPod
®
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Luggage net (holder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Cargo security screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Audio remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
4
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 3
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped or
printed on the key
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate
the keys easily. Remove the key
code tag and store it in a safe place.
Also, record the code number and
keep it in a safe and handy place, but
not in the vehicle.
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
FOLDING KEY
OVF041001
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original
parts for the ignition key in your
vehicle. If an aftermarket key is
used, the ignition switch may
not return to ON after START. If
this happens, the starter will
continue to operate causing
damage to the starter motor
and possible fire due to exces-
sive current in the wiring.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 4
45
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock (1)
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate (tailgate).
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and liftgate (tailgate) will
lock.The hazard warning lights will
blink once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2.The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
liftgate (tailgate) will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this section.
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition switch is in
the ACC or ON position.
Children could accidentally
place the key in the ignition
switch.
The ignition key would enable
children to operate power win-
dows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily
injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children,
when the engine is running.
OVF041003
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
64
Liftgate (Tailgate) unlock (3)
The liftgate (tailgate) is unlocked if
the button is pressed for more than 1
second.
Also, once the liftgate (tailgate) is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
(tailgate) will be locked automatically.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warn-
ing lights flash for about 30 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
1.5 seconds. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button except the
trunk button on the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
✽✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
• The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio substa-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close prox-
imity to your mobile phone, the
signal could be blocked by your
mobile phones normal operational
signals. This is especially impor-
tant when the phone is active such
as making and receiving calls, text
messaging, and/or sending/receiv-
ing emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your mobile
phone in the same pants or jacket
pocket and always try to maintain
an adequate distance between the
two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid and fire.
If the inside of the transmitter
gets damp (due to drinks or
moisture), or is heated, internal
circuit may malfunction, exclud-
ing the car from the warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 6
47
Features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032).When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
transmitter reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to excessive heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
may cause risk to human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks to verify if the ignition key is
valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
OLM042302
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to excessive heat or sunlight.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
84
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal and may
prevent the engine from being
started.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 8
49
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inopera-
tive due to changes or modifica-
tions not approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it
will not be covered by your man-
ufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
104
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped or printed
on the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you lose
your keys, this num-
ber will enable an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to duplicate the
keys easily.
Remove the key code tag and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate (tailgate))
and start the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
SMART KEY
ODM042002
WARNING - Smart key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the smart key is
dangerous even if the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in the ACC
or ON position. Children could
accidentally press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
The smart key would enable
children to operate power win-
dows or other controls, or even
make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily
injury or even death. Never
leave the keys in your vehicle
with unsupervised children,
when the Engine is running.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 10
411
Features of your vehicle
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate (tailgate).
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the liftgate
(tailgate) is open.
Using the button on the smart key
1 Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate (tailgate).
2. Press the lock button(1).
3.The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
4. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
ODM042006
OVF041004
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:17 PM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
124
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3.The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the lift-
gate (tailgate) will unlock and the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
❈ If you press the button of the front
passenger’s outside door handle
while carrying the smart key, all
doors will unlock.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 28~40in. (0.7~1m)
from the front outside door han-
dle, other people can also open the
doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2.The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the liftgate (tailgate) will unlock.
The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound two
times.
✽✽
NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this section.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 12
413
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate (Tailgate) unlocking
Using the liftgate (tailgate) handle
button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the liftgate (tailgate) handle
button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the liftgate (tailgate) is
opened and then closed, the lift-
gate (tailgate) will lock automati-
cally.
✽✽
NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the liftgate (tailgate)
handle.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the liftgate (tailgate) unlock
button(3) for more than 1 second.
2.When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Panic
1. Press the panic button(4) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 30
seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in section 5.
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
Care should be taken not to lose
your smart key.You will not be able to
start the engine without the smart
key in the vehicle. If you happen to
lose your smart key, and don't have
the spare key, you will not be able to
start the engine. You should get the
vehicle to your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer (tow the vehicle, if necessary)
in order to protect it from potential
theft.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
144
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximi-
ty to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart
key could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making a call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or send-
ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone
or smart phone in the same pants
or jacket pocket and maintain ade-
quate distance between the two
devices.
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it verifies if the smart key is valid
or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If
the inside of the smart key gets
damp (due to drinks or mois-
ture), or is heated, internal cir-
cuit may malfunction, excluding
the car from the warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 14
415
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
The transponder in your smart
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the smart key.
The engine may not start
because the metal accessories
may interrupt the transponder
signal from transmitting normal-
ly.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
164
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one.If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032).When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to excessive heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to excessive heat
or sunlight, or it will be dam-
aged.
OHG040009
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to changes or modifi-
cations not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 16
417
Features of your vehicle
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle.This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Using the smart key (if equipped)
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and liftgate (tailgate)
lid are closed and latched.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handle with the smart key in your
possession.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights and chime
will operate once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the doors
won't lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds.Close the door and try
again to lock the doors.
If the liftgate (tailgate) hatch or the
engine hood remains open, the haz-
ard warning lights and the chime
won't operate, and the theft alarm
will not arm. After you close the lift-
gate (tailgate) and engine hood, the
hazard warning lights blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the lock
button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights and chime
will operate once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or
engine hood remains open, the haz-
ard warning lights and chime won't
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. After you close the liftgate (tail-
gate) and engine hood, the hazard
warning lights blink once.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
184
Using the transmitter (if equipped)
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove
the ignition key from the ignition
switch.
2.Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and liftgate (tailgate)
are closed and latched.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or
engine hood remains open, the haz-
ard warning lights won't operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. After you
close all doors, liftgate (tailgate) and
engine hood, the hazard warning
lights blink once.
Using the mechanical key
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine and remove
the key from the ignition switch(if
equipped).
2.Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and liftgate (tailgate)
are closed and latched.
3. Lock the doors by inserting the key
into the key hole on the front out-
side door handle and turning the
key toward the rear of the vehicle.
If any door, liftgate (tailgate) or
engine hood remains open, the theft-
alarm will not arm.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key, the haz-
ard warning light won't operate.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or trunk)
or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the sys-
tem is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 18
419
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A door is opened without using the
transmitter, smart key or mechanical
key.
• The liftgate (tailgate) is opened
without using the transmitter or
smart key.
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 30 seconds. The
alarm will repeat once more unless
the system is disarmed. To turn off
the system, unlock the doors with the
mechanical key or transmitter or
smart key.
Disarmed stage
Using the smart key (if equipped)
The system will be disarmed when
the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the smart key or
pressing the lock/unlock button of the
front outside door handle with the
smart key in your possession.
After unlocking the doors, the hazard
warning lights and chime will operate
twice to indicate that the system is
disarmed.
After unlocking the doors, if any door
is not opened within 30 seconds, the
system will be rearmed.
Using the transmitter (if equipped)
The system will be disarmed when
the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the transmitter.
After unlocking the doors, the hazard
warning lights will blink twice to indi-
cate that the system is disarmed.
After unlocking the doors, if any door
is not opened within 30 seconds, the
system will be rearmed.
Using the mechanical key
The system will be disarmed when
the doors are unlocked with the
mechanical key.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you lock or unlock the doors by
using the mechanical key, the haz-
ard warning light and chime sound
won't operate.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 19
Features of your vehicle
204
✽✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
• If you lose your keys, contact your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 20
421
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Using the folding key (if equipped)
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
by pressing the lock button(1) and
unlock button(2) on the folding key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.When closing the door, push
the door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
For more detailed information, refer
to "Folding key" in this section.
Using the smart key (if equipped)
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in
your possession.
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
by pressing the lock button(1) and
unlock button(2) on the smart key.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.When closing the door, push
the door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
For more detailed information, refer
to “Smart key” in this section.
OVF041003
ODM042006
OVF041004
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
224
Using the mechanical key in an
emergency situation
If the smart key or folding key does
not operate normally, you can lock or
unlock the doors as follows:
1. Unfold the folding key or remove the
mechanical key from the smart key.
2. Insert the key into the hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the front of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the rear of the
vehicle to lock.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door
locks and door mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Tow Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User Settings" in this section.
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the door.
ODM042011
ODMECO2035
■ Type A
■ Type B
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 22
423
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
Door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button(1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button(1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the button will not be
visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle on either
front door is pulled when the door
lock button is in the locked position,
the door will unlock and open.
• The front door cannot be locked if
the ignition key is in the ignition
switch and the door is open.
• The door cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
Central door lock switch
Operate by depressing the central
door lock switch.
• When pushing down the lock switch
(1), all vehicle doors will lock.
ODM042013
ODM042014
OANNCO43001
■ driver’s door
■ Passenger’s door
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
244
• When pushing down the lock
release switch (2), all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and front door is open, the doors
will not lock even though the cen-
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is open, the doors
will not lock even though the cen-
tral door lock switch (1) is pressed.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.Furthermore,
children might operate features
of the vehicle that could injure
them, or they could encounter
other harm, possibly from some-
one gaining entry to the vehicle.
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 24
425
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if an impact or collision is
detected by the impact sensors while
the ignition switch is ON.
However, the doors may not be
unlocked if mechanical problems
occur with the door lock system or
battery.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User
Settings” as follows;
• Speed sensing auto door lock
• Auto door unlock when the igni-
tion key is removed from the igni-
tion switch or engine is turned off.
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the shift lever out of P(Park) or
into P(Park).
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this section.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into
the hole (1) and turn it to the lock
( ) position.When the child safe-
ty lock is in the lock position, the
rear door will not open even when
the inner door handle is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors are unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling
the inner door handle until the rear
door child safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle, resulting in severe
injury or death. To prevent chil-
dren from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear
door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in
the vehicle.
ODMECO2031
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
264
Non-powered liftgate
(tailgate)
Opening the liftgate (tailgate)
• The liftgate (tailgate) is locked or
unlocked when all doors are locked
or unlocked with either the key, the
transmitter, the smart key, or the
central door lock switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate (tailgate)
can be opened by pressing the
handle switch and pulling the han-
dle up.
• Only the liftgate (tailgate) is
unlocked if the liftgate (tailgate)
unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key is pressed for about 1
second, or the liftgate (tailgate)
handle button is pressed when the
smart key is detected.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
LIFTGATE (TAILGATE)
OANNCO2900
WARNING
The liftgate (tailgate) swings
upward. Make sure no objects
or people are near the rear of
the vehicle when opening the
liftgate (tailgate).
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
liftgate (tailgate) before driving
your vehicle. Possible damage
may occur to the liftgate (tail-
gate) lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the liftgate (tailgate)
is not closed prior to driving.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 26
427
Features of your vehicle
Closing the liftgate (tailgate)
To close the liftgate (tailgate), lower
and push down the liftgate (tailgate)
firmly. Make sure that the liftgate
(tailgate) is securely latched.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.To avoid
injury in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stops, occu-
pants should always be proper-
ly restrained.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the liftgate (tail-
gate) open, you will draw dan-
gerous exhaust fumes into your
vehicle which can cause seri-
ous injury or death to vehicle
occupants. If you must drive
with the liftgate (tailgate) open,
keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional
outside air comes into the vehi-
cle.
OANNCO43003
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
284
✽✽
NOTICE
When the engine is not running, the
power liftgate (power tailgate) can be
operated regardless of gear position.
However, if ignition switch is ON
position, the power liftgate (power
tailgate) can operate when the auto-
matic shift lever is in P (Park).
WARNING
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power liftgate (power
tailgate) that could result in
injury to themselves or others,
or damage the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the power lift-
gate (power tailgate) before
operating the power liftgate
(power tailgate). Wait until the
liftgate (tailgate) is opened fully
and stopped before loading or
unloading cargo or passengers
from the vehicle.
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM044504
ODM044505
Power liftgate (Power tailgate) (if equipped)
(1) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) open/close button
(2) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) handle switch
(3) Power liftgate (Power tailgate) close button
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 28
429
Features of your vehicle
Opening the liftgate (tailgate)
The power liftgate (power tailgate)
will open automatically by doing one
of the following:
• Press the liftgate (tailgate) unlock
button on the transmitter or smart
key for approximately one second.
• Press the power liftgate (power
tailgate) open button for approxi-
mately one second.
For emergency stop while operating,
press the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) open button shortly.
• Press the liftgate (tailgate) handle
switch carrying the smart key with
you.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
liftgate (power tailgate) manual-
ly. This may cause damage to
the power liftgate (power tail-
gate). If it is necessary to close
or open the power liftgate
(power tailgate) manually when
the battery is discharged or dis-
connected, do not apply exces-
sive force.
ODM044504
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
304
Closing the liftgate (tailgate)
• Press the power liftgate (power
tailgate) close button for approxi-
mately one second when the lift-
gate (tailgate) is opened.
The liftgate (tailgate) will close and
lock automatically.
For emergency stop while operating,
press the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) close button shortly.
• Press the power liftgate (power
tailgate) close button for approxi-
mately one second when the lift-
gate (tailgate) is opened.
The liftgate (tailgate) will close and
lock automatically.
Power liftgate (Power tailgate)
non-opening conditions
The power liftgate (power tailgate)
will not open or close automatically,
when the vehicle is moving more
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
ONCDCO3045
ONCDCO3044
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM044505
WARNING
The chime will sound continu-
ously if you drive over 2 mph (3
km/h) with the liftgate (tailgate)
opened. Stop your vehicle
immediately at a safe place and
check if your liftgate (tailgate) is
opened.
CAUTION
Operating the Power liftgate
(Power tailgate) more than 5
times continuously could cause
damages to the operating
motor. In this case, the system
enters into a thermal protection
mode. In thermal protection
mode, the Power liftgate (Power
tailgate) can not operate and the
chime will sound for 3 times by
any switch inputs. Leave your
Power liftgate (Power tailgate)
system for rest about 1 minute
and then operate.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 30
431
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• The power liftgate (power tailgate)
can be operated when the engine is
not running. However the power
liftgate (power tailgate) operation
consumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the bat-
tery from being discharged, do not
operate it excessively e.g.: more
than approximately 10 times
repeatedly.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
liftgate (power tailgate) in the
open position for a long lime.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) by yourself. This must be
done by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power liftgate
(power tailgate). This could cause
the power liftgate (power tailgate)
to operate improperly.
• In cold and wet climates, the
power liftgate (power tailgate) may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
Automatic reversal
During power opening and closing if
the power liftgate (power tailgate) is
blocked by an object or part of the
body, the power liftgate (power tail-
gate) will detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected while
opening the liftgate (tailgate), it will
stop and move in the opposite
direction.
• If the resistance is detected while
closing the liftgate (tailgate), it will
stop and move in the opposite
direction.
However, if the resistance is weak such
as from an object that is thin or soft, or
the liftgate (tailgate) is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and rever-
sal may not detect the resistance.
If the automatic reversal feature oper-
ates continuously more than twice
during opening or closing operation,
the power liftgate (power tailgate) may
stop at that position.At this time, close
the liftgate (tailgate) manually and
operate the liftgate (tailgate) automat-
ically again.
ODM044506
WARNING
Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in
the path of the power liftgate
(power tailgate) to make sure
the automatic reversal operates.
CAUTION
Do not put heavy stuffs on the
power liftgate (power tailgate)
before you operate the power
liftgate (power tailgate).
Additional weight on liftgate
(tailgate) could cause damages
to the system.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
324
How to reset the power liftgate
(power tailgate)
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse
has been replaced or disconnected,
for the power liftgate (power tailgate)
to operate normally, reset the power
liftgate (power tailgate) as follow:
1. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
2.While pressing the liftgate (tail-
gate) close button, press the lift-
gate (tailgate) handle switch for
more than 3 seconds. (the chime
will sound)
3. Close the liftgate (tailgate) manu-
ally.
If the power liftgate (power tailgate)
does not work properly after the
above procedure, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power liftgate (power tailgate)
does not operate normally, check
again if the gear position is in right
position.
Power liftgate (Power tailgate)
opening height user setting
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened liftgate (tailgate) by fol-
lowing the below instruction.
1. Position the liftgate (tailgate) man-
ually to the height you prefer.
2. Press the liftgate (tailgate) close
button for more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the liftgate (tailgate) manu-
ally after hearing the buzzer
sound.
The liftgate (tailgate) will open to the
height the driver has set up.
ODM044505
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.To avoid
injury in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stops, occu-
pants should always be proper-
ly restrained.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the liftgate (tail-
gate) open, you will draw dan-
gerous exhaust fumes into your
vehicle which can cause seri-
ous injury or death to vehicle
occupants. If you must drive
with the liftgate (tailgate) open,
keep the air vents and all win-
dows open so that additional
outside air comes into the vehi-
cle.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 32
433
Features of your vehicle
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
(if equipped)
On the vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the liftgate (tailgate) can be
opened with no-touch activation
using the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) system.
How to use the Smart Liftgate
(Smart Tailgate)
The liftgate (tailgate) can be opened
with no-touch activation satisfying all
the conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) does not operate when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is contin-
uously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and 60 inches
(1.5 m) from the front door han-
dles. (for vehicles equipped with
Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate), go to User Settings Mode
and select Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) on the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to "LCD dis-
play" in this chapter.
ODM044507
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
344
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the liftgate
(tailgate) will open.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area if
you do not want the liftgate (tailgate)
to open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The liftgate
(tailgate) will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the liftgate (tailgate) will slowly
open.
ODM044508
ODM044509
WARNING
• Make certain that you close
the liftgate (tailgate) before
driving your vehicle.
• Make sure there are no people
or objects around the liftgate
(tailgate) before opening or
closing the liftgate (tailgate).
• Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out
when opening the liftgate (tail-
gate) on the slope way. It may
cause serious injury.
• Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function when washing your
vehicle.
Otherwise, the liftgate (tail-
gate) may open inadvertently.
• The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
while playing around the rear
area of the vehicle.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 34
435
Features of your vehicle
How to deactivate the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function using the smart key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Liftgate (Tailgate) open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function for emergency situ-
ations.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton (2), the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function will be deacti-
vated temporarily. But, if you do
not open any door for 30 seconds,
the Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function will be activated
again.
• If you press the liftgate (tailgate)
open button (3) for more than 1
second, the liftgate (tailgate)
opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or liftgate (tailgate) open but-
ton (3) when the Smart Liftgate
(Smart Tailgate) function is not in
the Detect and Alert stage, the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function by pressing the smart key
button and opened a door, the
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
function can be activated again by
closing and locking all doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) operates with a welcome
alert if the smart key is detected
within 20~40 inches (50~100 cm)
from the liftgate (tailgate).
• The alert stops at once if the smart
key is positioned outside the
detecting area during the Detect
and Alert stage.
OVF041004
■ Smart key
ODM044510K
20~40 inches
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
364
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Smart Liftgate (Smart
Tailgate) function will not work if
any of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is slantingly parked
on a slope or unpaved road, etc.
Emergency liftgate (tailgate)
safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency liftgate (tailgate) safety
release lever located on the bottom
of the liftgate (tailgate). When some-
one is inadvertently locked in the lug-
gage compartment, the liftgate (tail-
gate) can be opened by doing as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the liftgate (tailgate).
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency liftgate (tailgate)
safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
liftgate (tailgate) if you are
accidentally locked in the lug-
gage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OANNCO43004
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 36
437
Features of your vehicle
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down
(7) Power window lock switch
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
ONC045081
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
384
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls that door's win-
dow.The driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the oper-
ation of passenger windows.The dri-
ver’s door has a master power win-
dow switch that controls all the win-
dows in the vehicle. The power win-
dows can be operated for approxi-
mately 30 seconds after the ignition
key is removed or turned to the ACC
or LOCK position. However, if the
front doors open, the power windows
cannot be operated within the 30
second period.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
ODM042020
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 38
439
Features of your vehicle
Auto up/down window (front seat)
(if equipped)
Pressing down or pulling up the
power window switch momentarily to
the second detent position (6) com-
pletely lowers or lifts the window
even when the switch is released.To
stop the window at the desired posi-
tion while the window is in operation,
momentarily pull or push the switch
in the direction opposite of the win-
dow’s movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close windows and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least 1 second after
the window is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
ODM042021
OUN026013
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
404
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). If
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously again within 5 seconds
after the window is lowered by the
automatic window reversal feature,
the automatic window reversal will
not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for
the driver’s window is only active
when the “auto up” feature is used
by fully pulling up the switch. The
automatic reverse feature will not
operate if the window is raised using
the halfway position on the power
window switch.
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers’ doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock posi-
tion(pressed).
When the power window lock switch
is pressed :
• The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passenger’s
power window.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
ODM042022
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 40
441
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the power window system,
do not open or close two win-
dows or more at the same
time. This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door
and the individual door win-
dow switch in opposing direc-
tions at the same time. If this is
done, the window will stop and
cannot be opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
• NEVER leave any child unat-
tended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inad-
vertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power win-
dow lock switch in the LOCK
position (depressed). Serious
injury can result from uninten-
tional window operation by
the child.
• Do not extend any head or
arms outside through the win-
dow opening while driving.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
424
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the second-
ary latch (1) inside of the hood up
and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
HOOD
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position, and setting the
parking brake.
ODM042023
ODM042024
WARNING
When you check the engine
compartment, please make sure
your head is not injured by the
hood safety hook which is
located inside of the hood.
ODMNMC2034
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 42
443
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised posi-
tion, as vision is obstructed
and the hood could fall or be
damaged.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
444
Opening the fuel filler door
The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling the
fuel filler door opener lever located
on the driver’s door.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the fuel filler door will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the door to
break the ice and release the door.
Do not pry on the door. If necessary,
spray around the door with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Pull the fuel filler door opener lever,
then the fuel filler door will pop up.
3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to
fully open.
4.To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler door
1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks one time. This indi-
cates that the cap is securely tight-
ened.
2. Close the fuel filler door and push
it in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
FUEL FILLER DOOR
ODM042025
ODM044026
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 44
445
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Tighten the cap until it clicks
one time, otherwise the
Malfunction Indicator Light
will illuminate.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
WARNING - Refueling
dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials.When refueling, please
note the following guidelines
carefully. Failure to follow these
guidelines may result in severe
personal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon,etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
464
(Continued)
• When refueling, always shut
the engine off. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical compo-
nents related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling is com-
plete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before start-
ing the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station
especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department or 911.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
(Continued)
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be sure
to place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the
vehicle should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric cur-
rent and/or electronic interfer-
ence from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
(Continued)
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehi-
cle according to the "Fuel
requirements" suggested in
section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a gen-
uine HYUNDAI cap or the
equivalent specified for your
vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler
cap can result in a serious
malfunction of the fuel system
or emission control system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely
to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 46
447
Features of your vehicle
Emergency fuel filler door
release
If the fuel filler door does not open
using the remote fuel filler door
release, you can open it manually.
Unsnap and remove the panel in the
cargo area. Pull the handle outward
slightly.
ODM042027
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
484
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
Type A
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Type B
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK position. However,
if the front doors are opened, the
sunroof cannot be opened even with-
in the 30 seconds period.
• In cold and wet climates, the sun-
roof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
ODM042028
CAUTION - Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to move the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehi-
cle. If the sunroof is opened,rain
or snow may leak through the
sunroof and wet the interior as
well as cause theft.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 48
449
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
Type A
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed.
Type B
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed.
The warning chime will sound for a few
seconds and a message "Sunroof
Open" will appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
ODMECO2002/Q
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• If you would like to carry items
on the roof using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the
roof, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass roof.
• Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
CAUTION
Do not extend any luggage out
side the sunroof while driving.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
504
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Press the sunshade open button (1).
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
Type A
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof
glass opened, the sunshade will
be closed halfway.
- Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down.
Type B
- Press the sunshade close button (2).
❈ When you press the sunshade
close button (2) with the sunroof
glass opened, the sunshade will
be closed halfway, then sunroof
glass will be closed and then sun-
shade will be fully closed finally.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
ODM042029
CAUTION
• Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand. It could cause
sunshade failure.
• Close the sunroof when driv-
ing through dusty roads. Dust
may cause a malfunction of
the vehicle system.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 50
451
Features of your vehicle
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunshade and sunroof
glass will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only the front glass of the panora-
ma sunroof opens and closes.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide
halfway open then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
ODM042030
ODM042033
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
524
Closing the sunroof
To close (or tilt down) the sunroof
- Pull the sunroof glass control lever
downward (or forward).
Type A
❈ When you pull the sunroof glass
control lever downward (or for-
ward) with the sunshade opened,
the sunshade will be closed
halfway and then glass will be
closed (or tilt down) and then sun-
shade will be fully closed finally.
Type B
❈ When you pull the sunroof glass
control lever downward (or for-
ward) with the sunshade opened,
the glass will be closed (or tilt
down).
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms
or body outside the sunroof while
driving.
OYF049215
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that someone’s
head, hands and body are not
trapped by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through
an opened sunroof while driv-
ing.
• Make sure your hands and face
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
• A panoramic sunroof is made of
glass, therefore it may break in
an accident. If you do not have
your seat belt on, you may con-
tact the broken glass and get
injured or killed. For all passen-
gers safety, have the seat belts
on. (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.)
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 52
453
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the
followings)
- Battery is discharged or discon-
nected or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of
the sunroof does not normally oper-
ate
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2.Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3.Release the sunroof control lever.
4.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close
(about 10 seconds) until the sun-
roof moves a little. Then, release
the lever.
5.Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close, until
the sunroof operates as follows
again:
The sunshade and sunroof glass
slide open → The sunroof glass
slide close → The sunshade close
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you drive with the sunroof
opened right after a car wash
or rain, water may get inside
the vehicle.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
544
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steer-
ing control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
is completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate nor-
mally, the warning light will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. The steering wheel
may become difficult to con-
trol or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
and have the vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
• When you operate the steer-
ing wheel in low temperature,
abnormal noise could occur. If
temperature rises, the noise
will disappear.This is a normal
condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary,
if you turn the steering wheel
all the way to the left or right
continuously, the steering
wheel becomes heavier from
the end. But this is for your
safety, not system malfunc-
tion. As time passes, the
steering wheel return to its
normal condition.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 54
455
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise could occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warn-
ing light comes on or the voltage is
low (When the alternator (or bat-
tery) does not operate normally or
it malfunctions), the steering wheel
may get heavy and become diffi-
cult to control operate abnormally.
Tilt steering
A tilt steering wheel allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can also raise it to give
your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle (if equipped).
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (if
equipped) (3), then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
WARNING - Steering
• Never adjust the angle and
height of steering wheel while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
ODM042036
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
564
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate and notify you on the
LCD display.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
CAUTION
Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
OANNCO43006
ODM042038
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 56
457
Features of your vehicle
Driver selectable steering
mode
The driver selectable steering mode
controls steering effort according to
the driver's preference.
You can select the desired steering
mode by pressing the driver selec-
table steering mode button.
The driver selectable steering mode
will recall the steering mode that was
selected when the engine was last
turned on.
When the steering mode button is
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the LCD display.
If the steering mode button is pressed
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change in the sequence shown by
the arrows in the above images.
ODM042039
ODM042044
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM042040
CAUTION
• Do not strike the horn severe-
ly to operate it, or hit it with
your fist. Do not press on the
horn with a sharp-pointed
object.
• When cleaning the steering
wheel, do not use an organic
solvent such as thinner, ben-
zene, alcohole and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
steering wheel.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
584
If the steering wheel mode button is
not pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen.
Normal mode
The normal mode offers medium
steering effort.
Comfort mode
The steering effort becomes lighter
in comfort mode.
ODM042041
ODM042045
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM042042
ODM042046
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 58
459
Features of your vehicle
Sport mode
The sport mode adjusts the steering
effort to a heavier, more sporty feel.
ODM042043
ODM042047
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
• For your safety, if you press
the steering mode button to
change the mode while turn-
ing the steering wheel, the
LCD display will change as
you selected, but the steering
effort will not change. After
that, if you leave the steering
wheel centered, the steering
effort will change to the
selected mode.
• Be careful when changing the
steering mode while driving.
• When the electronic power
steering is not working prop-
erly, the driver selectable
steering mode will not work.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
604
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Blue Link
®
center (if equipped)
For the details, refer to the Blue Link
®
Owner’s Guide, navigation manual or
audio manual.The audio manual is in
this section.
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
OMD040031
Day
Night
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and do not install a wide mirror.
It could result in injury, during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag.
OFS042222N
OYF042250N
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 60
461
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass and HomeLink
®
system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation.For more
information regarding NVS
®
mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
OEN046033N
CAUTION
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving con-
ditions based upon light levels
monitored in front of the vehicle
and from the rear of the vehicle.
These light sensors are visible
through openings in the front and
rear of the mirror case.Any object
that would obstruct either light
sensor will degrade the automat-
ic dimming control feature.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
624
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by pushing the ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2.Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing.This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 62
463
Features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for
more than 3 but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number
will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes.To re-cali-
brate the compass:
B520C05NF
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
644
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2.To calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-
frequency (RF) transmitters with a
single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to
operate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. Both standard and
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink
®
information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
CAUTION
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage. Do not use
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and
reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener with-
out these features increases the
risk of serious injury or death.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 64
465
Features of your vehicle
Programming HomeLink
®
✽✽
NOTICE
• When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quick-
er training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or "accessories") position
for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and Channel
3 Buttons, until the indicator light
begins to flash (after 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
the buttons for longer than 30 sec-
onds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
buttons
while keeping the indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4.While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink
®
successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter.Release
both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED.If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate when
the HomeLink
®
button is pressed
and released.
6.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
664
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner's
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit. Exact location
and color of the button may vary by
garage door opener brand. If there
is difficulty locating the training but-
ton, reference the device owner's
manual or please visit our Web site
at www.homelink.com.
2.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light").
✽✽
NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for two seconds and
then release the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the pro-
gramming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED.If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your device should activate.
5.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 66
467
Features of your vehicle
Gate operator & Canadian pro-
gramming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned.The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink
®
button, fol-
low these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button.Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2.When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink
®
surface.
3.Press and hold the handheld
transmitter button.The HomeLink
®
indicator light will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
4.When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe
the red Status Indicator LED.If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and
your new device should activate.
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the Programming
sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
684
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system, compass
and Blue Link
®
(if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1) Telematics button
(2) Telematics button
(3) Telematics button
(4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor
WARNING
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
OYF042250N
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 68
469
Features of your vehicle
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation.For more
information regarding NVS
®
mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
✽✽
NOTICE
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving condi-
tions based upon light levels moni-
tored in front of the vehicle and
from the rear of the vehicle. These
light sensors are visible through
openings in the front and rear of the
mirror case. Any object that
obstructs either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by the Dimming ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing and hold the button for
3 seconds turns the autodimming
function OFF which is indicated by
the green Status Indicator LED
turning off.
2. Pressing and hold the button for
3 seconds again turns the auto-
dimming function ON which is indi-
cated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
704
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing.This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 70
471
Features of your vehicle
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for 6
seconds, the current Zone
Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes.To re-cali-
brate the compass:
1. Press and hold the button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2.To calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-
frequency (RF) transmitters with a
single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to
operate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. Both standard and
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink
®
information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
724
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
Programming HomeLink
®
✽✽
NOTICE
• When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quick-
er training and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or "accessories") position
for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage. Do not use
HomeLink
®
with any garage
door opener that lacks the safe-
ty stop and reverse features
required by U.S. federal safety
standards (this includes any
garage door opener model man-
ufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot
detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does
not meet current U.S. federal
safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the
risk of serious injury or death.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 72
473
Features of your vehicle
Programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
(
,
), HomeLink
®
Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 sec-
onds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapid blinking
light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink
®
and hand-held
transmitter buttons.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
section. If the HomeLink
®
indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com.
4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds
and release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button up to two sepa-
rate times to activate the door.If the
door does not activate, press and
hold the just-trained HomeLink
®
but-
ton and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-
plete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most com-
monly a garage door opener).
OYF042252N
Flashing
OYF042251N
Flashing
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
744
5. At the garage door opener receiv-
er (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" but-
ton. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
6.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the programmed
HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on
the brand of the garage door
opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming process.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
Gate operator & Canadian
programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming por-
tion of this document) while you
press and re-press ("cycle") your
handheld transmitter every two sec-
onds until the frequency signal has
been learned. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds upon successful
training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a device to HomeLink
®
using a HomeLink
®
button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT
release the button.
2.The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds.Without releasing
the HomeLink
®
button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 74
475
Features of your vehicle
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the
Programming sections above.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the
Gentex Corporation, Zeeland,
Michigan. HomeLink
®
is a registered
trademark owned by Johnson
Controls, Incorporated, Milwaukee,
Wisconsin.
CAUTION
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
764
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch.The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing
in a narrow street.
Remote control
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by force.
Use an approved spray de-icer
(not radiator antifreeze) to
release the frozen mechanism or
move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving.This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, seri-
ous injury or property damage.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with warm water.
CAUTION - Outside
rearview
mirrors
• The right outside rearview
mirror is convex. Objects seen
in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
• Use your interior rearview mir-
ror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
OANNCO2076
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 76
477
Features of your vehicle
To adjust the position of the mirrors:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Move the lever(1) to R (right) or L
(left) to select the right side mirror
or the left side mirror.
3. Press a corresponding point on
the mirror adjustment control to
position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
4. After the adjustment, position the
lever in the center to prevent inad-
vertent movement.
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
When you shift the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) position, the outside
rearview mirror(s) will move down-
ward to aid reverse parking.
According to the position of the out-
side rearview mirror control switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
Left or Right :When the outside
rearview mirror con-
trol switch is in the L
(Left) or R (Right)
position, both outside
rearview mirrors will
move downward.
Neutral :When the outside rearview
mirror control switch is in
the neutral (center) posi-
tion, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate.
✽✽
NOTICE
The outside rearview mirrors will
automatically revert to their original
positions under the following condi-
tions:
• When the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button is set to the ACC
or OFF position.
• When the shift lever is moved to
any position except the R
(Reverse) position.
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the mirror.
ODM044035N
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
784
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Blind zone mirror (BZM)
(if equipped)
The blind zone mirror (BZM) is sup-
plemental mirror to reduce a driver's
blind zone that will show the rear
side territory of your vehicle. The
blind zone mirror is equipped with
the driver's outside rearview mirror.
ODM072031
WARNING
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind zone mirror.
• The blind zone mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mir-
ror but always pay attention to
drive safely.
OFS053068
OFS043249
CAUTION
Do not clean the glass of any
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel
or other petroleum-based on
cleaning products.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 78
479
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1.Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6.Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
7.Turn signal indicator lights
ODMNMM2054/ODMNMM2055
■■
Type A
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■■
Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
804
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
moving the illumination control knob
right or left when the ignition switch
or Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or
the tale lights are turned on.
• The brightness has 20 levels : 1
(MIN) ~ 20 (MAX)
• If you hold the illumination control
knob on the right end (+) or left end
(-), the brightness will be changed
continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
modes
(2) : MOVE button for changing
items
(3) : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
ODM042224
ODM042056
ODMEDI2001/ODMEDI2029
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 80
481
Features of your vehicle
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
ODMNMM2057
ODMNMM2058
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMNMM2059
ODMNMM2221
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
824
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
ODMNMM2222/ODMNMM2352
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMNMM2223/ODMNMM2352
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 82
483
Features of your vehicle
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °F to °C
or from °C to °F) can be changed by
using the “User Settings”mode of the
LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
WARNING - Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
ODMEDI2902/ODMEDI2904
■ Type A
■ Type B
OANNDI2901/OANNDI2902
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
844
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
ODMEDI2907/OVF041049
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 84
485
Features of your vehicle
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes
Symbol
Explanation
Type A Type B
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter,
fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Service
This mode informs of the tire pressure information, service
interval (mileage or days) and warning messages related to
TPMS, or washer fluid.
User Settings
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps,
and so on.
A/V
(if equipped)
- This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Turn By Turn
(if equipped)
- This mode displays the state of the navigation.
or
or
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
❈ For "Trip Computer" mode, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
864
Service Mode
Service Interval
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service in" message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position (The mileage and
time changes to "---").
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the SELECT/RESET button
for more than 1 second.
Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
“Service in OFF” message is dis-
played on the LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
OANNDI2066/OANNDI2070
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2067/ODM044518LF
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2068/ODMEDI2072
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 86
487
Features of your vehicle
User Settings Mode
Description
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
ODMEDI2025/ODMEDI2054
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
884
Two Press Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated.Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Power liftgate (Power tailgate)
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the power lift-
gate (power tailgate) system function
will be activated.
Smart Liftgate (Smart Tailgate)
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the Smart
Liftgate (Smart Tailgate) system
function will be activated.
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Lamp
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome func-
tion will be activated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the puddle lamp will
be activated.
Auto Triple Turn
(One-touch triple turn signal)
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3 times when
the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
One Touch Turn Signal (if equipped)
• Off:
The one touch turn signal function
will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashing :
The lane change signals will blink
3, 5, or 7 times when the turn sig-
nal lever is moved slightly.
For more details, refer to ''Light'' in
this chapter.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 88
489
Features of your vehicle
Settings
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Welcome Sound
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Shift Indicator (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the shift indi-
cator function will be activated.
For more details, refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in this chapter.
Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped)
Choose the tire pressure unit.
(psi, kPa, Bar)
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refu-
eling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
OANNDI2065/OANNDI2069
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
904
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
ODMEDI2910ODMEDI2909
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 90
491
Features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while
turning the steering wheel right
and left.
ODMEDI2003/ODMEDI2031
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2004/ODMEDI2032
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2002/ODMEDI2030
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
924
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
ODMEDI2005/ODMEDI2033
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2006/ODMEDI2034
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2007/ODMEDI2035
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 92
493
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
ODMEDI2009/ODMEDI2037
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2010/ODMEDI2038
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2011/ODMEDI2039
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
944
Press start button with smart key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
ODMEDI2012/ODMEDI2040
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2013/ODMEDI2041
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2014/ODMEDI2042
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 94
495
Features of your vehicle
Door Open
• It means that any door is open.
Liftgate (Tailgate) Open
• It means that the liftgate (tailgate)
is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine (and then
open the driver's door, if equipped)
when the sunroof is open.
ODMEDI2017/ODMEDI2045
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2018/ODMEDI2046
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2019/ODMEDI2047
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
964
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
Low Tire Pressure (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the tire pressure is low with the
ignition switch or the Engine/Start
Button in ON position.
For more information, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
ODMEDI2020/ODMEDI2049
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAN064003/ODM064020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2021/ODMEDI2050
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 96
497
Features of your vehicle
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
(if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
Check fuel cap
• It means that the fuel filler cap is
not tightened securely.
ODMEDI2024/ODMEDI2053
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMEDI2022/ODMEDI2051
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
984
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Distance To Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 98
499
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi.
or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
SELECT/RESET button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the tripmeter is dis-
played.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range:0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the SELECT/RESET button
on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm):00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press
the SELECT/RESET button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
OANNDI2062/OANNDI2063
■ Type A
OANNDI2058/OANNDI2060
■ Type B
- Trip A - Trip B
- Trip A - Trip B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
1004
Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
• The distance to empty is the esti-
mated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 30 ~ 9999 mi or
50 ~ 9999 km.
• If the estimated distance is below
30 mi.(50 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the SELECT/RESET
button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the aver-
age fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
✽✽
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50
meters) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
OANNDI2061/OANNDI2056
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 100
4101
Features of your vehicle
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range:0 ~ 50 MPG
or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
One time driving information
mode (if equipped)
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
vehicle can be driven with the
remaining fuel (3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally.The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1 mi.(1km), the distance to empty (3)
will display as "---" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (4).
✽✽
NOTICE
If "Window Open" or "Sunroof
Open" warning message are dis-
played in the cluster, this display
may not be displayed in the cluster.
OAN064002/OAN064001
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
1024
Warning lights
✽✽
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 102
4103
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leak on the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING - Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
1044
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er as soon as possible.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 104
4105
Features of your vehicle
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline
Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
1064
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
CAUTION - Engine
Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 106
4107
Features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7).If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Engine Oil
Pressure
Warning Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2.Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and dam-
age the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
1084
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
The location of the underinflated
tires are displayed on the LCD dis-
play. (if equipped)
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
WARNING - Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
- Low tire pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 108
4109
Features of your vehicle
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Liftgate (Tailgate) Open
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the liftgate (tailgate) is not
closed securely.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
1104
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
ECO Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When you activate the active ECO
system by pressing the ACTIVE
ECO button.
For more details, refer to “Active
ECO System” in chapter 5.
ECO
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 110
4111
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
1124
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
CAUTION - AWD Lock
Mode
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 112
4113
Features of your vehicle
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in section 5.
Downhill Brake Control
(DBC) Indicator Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC sys-
tem by pressing the DBC button.
This warning light blinks:
• When the DBC is operating.
This warning light illuminates yellow:
• When there is a malfunction with
the DBC system.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to “Downhill
Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
CRUISE
SET
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
1144
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within a dis-
tance of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the
vehicle.This system is a supplemen-
tal system and it is not intended to
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention by the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the back sen-
sors are limited. Whenever backing-
up, pay as much attention to what is
behind you as you would in a vehicle
without a rear parking assist system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated.
If you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The rear parking assist system
is a supplementary function
only. The operation of the rear
parking assist system can be
affected by several factors
(including environmental condi-
tions). It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
ODM042232
Sensors
OANNDR2100
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 114
4115
Features of your vehicle
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 10 km/h (6 mph), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the
rear parking assist system is in
operation is approximately 47 in.
(120 cm).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est objects will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 47 in. to 24 in.
(120 cm to 61 cm) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-
tently.
• When an object is 23 in. to 12 in.
(60 cm to 31 cm) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
• When an object is within 11.8 in.
(30 cm) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor.(It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2.The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4.Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6.Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7.Trailer towing.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
1164
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1.The sensor is covered with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2.Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
40 in. (1 m) and narrower than 6
in. (14 cm) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound sequentially
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or cov-
ered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
any debris is removed and the sen-
sors are cleaned. Use only a soft
cloth to clean the sensors.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor.Sensor damage could occur.
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors; it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 116
4117
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis (if equipped)
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more
of the below occurs you may have a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants due to a rear
parking assist system malfunc-
tion. Always drive safely and
cautiously.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor. Always per-
form a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
1184
The rearview camera will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
ignition switch ON and the shift lever
in the R position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the monitor while backing-up.
1.Vehicle width
2. 39 in.(100 cm) from the rear bumper
3. 19 in.(50 cm) from the rear bumper
4. 118 in. (300 cm) from the rear
bumper
✽✽
NOTICE
The rearview camera may not oper-
ate normally, in extremely high or
low temperatures (operating temper-
ature : -13°F~149°F (-20°C~65°C)).
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• This system is a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the inside/out-
side rearview mirror and the
area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the cam-
era may not operate normally.
ODM042238
ODM044239N
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 118
4119
Features of your vehicle
The hazard warning flasher should
be used whenever you find it neces-
sary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
This causes all turn signal lights to
blink. The hazard warning lights will
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
ODM042242
ODM042243
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4A.QXP 3/5/2015 3:18 PM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
1204
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged.The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key : turns off the engine)
and opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if
the driver parks on the side of the
road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed
(smart key : turns off the engine),
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlamp delay
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or OFF position with the head-
lights ON, the headlights remain on
for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed,
the headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
the light switch to the OFF or Auto
position.
However, if you turn the light switch
to the Auto position when it is dark
outside, the headlights will not be
turned off.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to “User Settings” in
this section.
LIGHTING
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehi-
cle through other doors (other
than the driver's door), the bat-
tery saver function does not
operate and the headlamp delay
does not turn off automatically.
This will cause the battery to be
discharged. In this case, make
sure to turn off the lamp before
getting out of the vehicle.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 120
4121
Features of your vehicle
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) DRL OFF position
(2) AUTO light position
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
(1) OFF position
(2) DRL ON position
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail, position,
license plate lights and the tail light
indicator will turn on.
ODMECO2008OLF044084N
■ Type A
ODM044601A
ODMECO2005
■ Type B
■ Type C
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
1224
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail, license
and instrument panel lights will turn
on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the
ON position to turn on the head-
lights.
AUTO light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tun-
nels and parking facilities.
ODMECO2012
CAUTION
• Never place anything over
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel. This will
ensure better AUTO light sys-
tem control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coat-
ing on the front windshield,
the AUTO light system may
not work properly.
ODMECO2010
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 122
4123
Features of your vehicle
Daytime running light (DRL)
(if equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL will turn off when:
• Type A
1. The light switch is not in the AUTO
position.
2. The light switch is in the headlight
position.
3. The parking brake is applied.
4. The engine is turned off.
• Type B
1. The light switch is not in DRL posi-
tion.
2. The light switch is in the headlight
position.
3. The parking brake is applied.
4. The engine is turned off.
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
ODMECO2013
WARNING
Do not use the high beams
when there are other vehicles.
Using high beam could obstruct
the other driver's vision.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
1244
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating. They will
self-cancel after a turn is completed.
If the indicator continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever
to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
ODMECO2026
ODMECO2014
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 124
4125
Features of your vehicle
One-touch triple turn signal
(One Touch Turn Signal)
To activate the one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3
(5 or 7, if equipped) times.
You can activate/deactivate the One
Touch Turn Signal function or choose
the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7)
from the User Settings Mode on the
LCD display (if equipped).
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide illumi-
nation close to the road surface
when visibility is poor due to fog, rain
or snow, etc.
1.Turn on the park light.
2.Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3.To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the park
light.
ODMECO2015
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog
lights consume large amounts
of vehicle electrical power. Only
use the fog lights when visibility
is poor or unnecessary battery
and generator drain could
occur.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
1264
A :Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjust-
ment
C :Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· OFF – Off
E :Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OANNCO43007
OANNCO43008
Windshield wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer
/AUTO
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 126
4127
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield,
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the wind-
shield wipers to ensure proper oper-
ation.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When you operate the wipers, if
your vehicle has a problem in any
part of the wiper operation sys-
tem, the wiper may operate in the
LO mode regardless of the wiper
switch position. In this case, have
your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When the ignition key is removed,
the wiper blade sometimes may
move slightly for reducing the
deterioration of the windshield
wipers.
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to per-
form a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
ODMECO4022
Rain sensor
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situa-
tions to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
1284
Windshield washers
(if equipped)
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level.If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
OANNCO43009
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice may
damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow
and ice and defrost the wind-
shield properly prior to operat-
ing the windshield wipers.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 128
4129
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and
washer switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : High wiper speed
LO : Low wiper speed
OFF : Off
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
OANNCO43010
OANNCO43011
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 129
Features of your vehicle
1304
Automatic turn off function
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
5 seconds after the system is in the
armed stage.
Map lamp
Press the lens (1) to turn the map
lamp on or off
• ON (2):The map lamp and room
lamp stays on at all times.
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
ODM042258
ODM042259
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 130
4131
Features of your vehicle
• OFF (3): The lamps are off even if a
door is opened.
• ROOM (4):The map lamp and
room lamp stays on at
all times.
• DOOR (5):
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on when doors are
unlocked with a transmitter or
smart key as long as the doors
are closed. The lamps go out
after approximately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
comes on for approximately 30
seconds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
✽✽
NOTICE
When the lamp is turned on by
pressing the lens (1), the lamp does
not turn off even if the switch is in
the OFF position (3).
Room lamp
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
ODM042341
■ Type B
ODM042260
■ Type A
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 131
Features of your vehicle
1324
Luggage room lamp
• ON :The luggage room lamp stays
on at all times.
• DOOR : The luggage room lamp
comes on when the liftgate
(tailgate) is opened.
• OFF :The luggage room lamp is off.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Pull the sunvisor downward and you
can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or
OFF by pushing the button.
• :To turn the lamp ON.
• O :To turn the lamp OFF.
OYF049209
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary battery
drain, turn off the lamp by push-
ing the O button after using the
lamp.
OXM049136
CAUTION
Do not leave the lamp switches
on for an extended period of
time when the vehicle is not run-
ning because the battery may
drain.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 132
4133
Features of your vehicle
Headlamp welcome
When the headlight(light switch in
the headlight or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and liftgate (tailgate))
are locked and closed, the headlight,
position light and tail light will come
on for 15 seconds if any of the below
is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button (on the transmitter or smart
key), the lights will turn off immedi-
ately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
liftgate (tailgate)) are locked and
closed, the room lamp will come on
for 30 seconds if any of the below is
performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp
(if equipped)
When all doors are locked and
closed, the puddle lamp and pocket
lamp will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
WELCOME SYSTEM
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 133
Features of your vehicle
1344
✽✽
NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield defrosting and defog-
ging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster but-
ton again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
front wiper deicer, it will be operating
at the same time you operate the
front windshield defroster.
DEFROSTER
ODM042271
■ Manual climate control
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
■ Automatic climate control
ODM042272
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 134
4135
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ODM042273
1. MAX A/C (Max air conditioning)
button
2. A/C (Air conditioning) button
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Fan speed control knob
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Front windshield defrost button
7.Temperature control switch
8. Air intake control button
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 135
Features of your vehicle
1364
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on
OANNMM2001
❈❈
Air outlet vents for rear seat (E, F)
• The air flow of the rear outlet vents (F)is controlled by the front climate con-
trol system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor.
• The air flow of the rear outlet vents (E, F) may be weaker than the instru-
ment panel vents for the long air duct.
• Close the rear outlet vents (F) in cold weather. The air flow of the rear out-
let vents may not be as warm during heating operation. (Use the rear out-
let vents (F) during cooling operation.)
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 136
4137
Features of your vehicle
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side vents.
ODMECL2002
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 137
Features of your vehicle
1384
MAX A/C-Level (B, D)
To operate the MAX A/C, turn the fan
speed control knob to the right to
maximum fan speed, then press the
MAX A/C button. Air flow is directed
toward the upper body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning, the
recirculated air position and max
cool temperature will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control switch
allows you to control the temperature
of the airflow in the vehicle.
To change the temperature:
• Press the (red) switch to
increase temperature.
• Press the (blue) switch to
decrease temperature.
The temperature status will be dis-
played at the above switch panel as
an indicator.
ODM042277
ODM042280
ODM042279
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 138
4139
Features of your vehicle
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi-
tion.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged operation of
the air conditioning with the recir-
culated air position selected will
result in excessively dry air in the
passenger compartment.
ODM042281
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 139
Features of your vehicle
1404
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the “0”position.
ODM042282
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in the
recirculated air position with-
out A/C selected may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. This may cause
serious harm or death due to
a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
may cause drowsiness or
sleepiness and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake con-
trol to the outside (fresh) air
position as much as possible
while driving.
ODM042283
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 140
4141
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
through the ventilation system,
temporarily set the air intake con-
trol to the recirculated air position.
Be sure to return the control to the
fresh air position when the irritation
has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle.This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
ODM042284
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 141
Features of your vehicle
1424
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friend-
ly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recircu-
lated air position will excessively
dry the air.In this case, change the
air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position then set the
fan speed control to the highest
speed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• While using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine tem-
perature gauge closely while driv-
ing up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the blow-
er fan but turn the air condition-
ing system off if the engine tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
• Opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning operates
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air condi-
tioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• During the winter months, use the
air conditioning system every
month for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle.This condensation is
a normal system operation charac-
teristic.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 142
4143
Features of your vehicle
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner
excessively, the difference
between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the wind-
shield could cause the outer sur-
face of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the position and
fan speed control to the lower
speed.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty,
rough roads, more frequent cli-
mate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 143
Features of your vehicle
1444
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
It is important that the correct type
and amount of oil and refrigerant is
used. Otherwise, damage to the
compressor and abnormal system
operation may occur.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
The actual Air Conditioning refriger-
ant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
WARNING
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
OHG045533N
■ Example
WARNING
For more detailed information,
we recommend that you contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper service may cause
serious injury to the person per-
forming the service.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 144
4145
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
ODMECL2010/OANNMM2002
1. A/C display
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Blower OFF button
4. Air conditioning button
5. Driver's temperature control button
6. Front fan speed control knob
7. Air intake control button
8. Passenger's temperature control button
9. Mode selection button
10. Dual temperature control selection button
11. Front windshield defroster button
12. Rear window defroster button
13. Climate control information screen
selection button*
* if equipped
■■
Type A
■■
Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 145
Features of your vehicle
1464
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2. Set the driver’s temperature con-
trol switch to set the desired tem-
perature.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or knob of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Fan speed control knob
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
ODM042287
ODM042290
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 146
4147
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
ODM042336
ODM042288
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 147
Features of your vehicle
1484
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
ODM042279ODM042289
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 148
4149
Features of your vehicle
Temperature control
The temperature will increase by
pushing the up button. Each push of
the button will cause the temperature
to increase by 1°F/0.5°C.
The temperature will decrease by
pushing the down button. Each push
of the button will cause the tempera-
ture to decrease by 1°F/0.5°C. When
set to the lowest temperature setting,
the air conditioning will operate con-
tinuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Pressing
the right temperature control but-
ton will automatically switch to the
DUAL mode as well.
2. Press the left temperature control
button to adjust the driver side
temperature. Press the right tem-
perature control button to adjust
the passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest or lowest tempera-
ture setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-
vated for maximum heating or cooling.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-
senger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control
button. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is a normal condition. You can
switch the temperature mode between
Fahrenheit to Celsius as follows;
While pressing the OFF button,
depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-
onds or more. The display will
change from Fahrenheit to Celsius,
or from Celsius to Fahrenheit.
ODMECL2003
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
ODM042291
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 149
Features of your vehicle
1504
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
OANNMM2003
■ Type A, B
■ Type A
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 150
4151
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by turning the fan
speed control knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered.
To turn off the fan speed, press the
OFF button.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
WARNING
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. This may cause
serious harm or death due to
a drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
may cause drowsiness or
sleepiness and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake con-
trol to the outside (fresh) air
position as much as possible
while driving.
ODM042293
OANNMM2004
■ Type A ■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 151
Features of your vehicle
1524
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn off the
air climate control system. However,
you can still operate the mode and
air intake buttons as long as the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
Climate information screen selec-
tion (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
ODM042295
ODM042297
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 152
4153
Features of your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
✽✽
NOTICE
Be sure to keep the interior surface
of the windshield clean by wiping it
with a clean cloth and glass cleaner.
This will help reduce the tendency of
the glass fogging and also improve
visibility.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired temperature.
2. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
3. Select the or position.
4.The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.
ODM042298
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 153
Features of your vehicle
1544
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
3. Select the position.
4.The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
Automatic climate control sys-
tem
To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired temperature.
2. Select desired fan speed.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
3. Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
ODM042299
OANNMM2005
OANNMM2006
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 154
4155
Features of your vehicle
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture of inside the wind-
shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the
automated steps operate as follows:
If auto defogging does not defog the
window at step 1, outside air position,
step 2, blowing air toward the wind-
shield occurs.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air conditioning
The auto defogging system is auto-
matically activated when the condi-
tions are met. However, if you would
like to cancel the auto defogging sys-
tem, press the front defroster button
4 times within 2 seconds while press-
ing the AUTO button.The indicator of
the front defroster button will blink 3
times to notify you that the system is
cancelled.To use the auto defogging
system again, follow the procedures
mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the air conditioning is
turned on by Auto defogging sys-
tem, if you try to turn off the air
conditioning, the indicator will
blink 3 times and the air condi-
tioning will not be turned off.
• For efficiency, do not select recir-
culated air position while Auto
defogging system is operating.
ODM042303
CAUTION
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to system parts could
occur and may not be covered
by your vehicle warranty.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 155
Features of your vehicle
1564
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key (1).
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open (3). Close the glove
box after use.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely.
ODM042304
ODMECO2033
ODMECO2032
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 156
4157
Features of your vehicle
Multi box (if equipped)
To open the cover, push the lever (1)
and the multi box will open automati-
cally.
It can be used for storing small items.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses in the
compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop,always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the multi box
open.
ODM042307 ODM042308
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 157
Features of your vehicle
1584
Luggage tray
You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
Rear
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
Front
1. Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.
2. Push the cover toward the front of
the vehicle and fold it.
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
OANNCO43012
■ Rear
OANNCO43013
■ Front
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 158
4159
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
To use the center cup holder, pull
down the armrest and press the open
button.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bot-
tles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not
put/leave them in a hot vehicle.
The container/contents may
explode.
OANNCO43014
ODM042316
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at
high temperatures. This may
damage the chrome part of the
cup holder.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 159
Features of your vehicle
1604
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the visor and slide the mirror cover
(3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension (if
equipped) forward or backward (4).
Power outlet
CAUTION
• Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvi-
sor.
• Always use the sunvisor
extension, after swinging the
sunvisor to the side.
ODMECO2037
ODM042318
OANNCO43015
■ Center
■ Front
■ Rear (if equipped)
OYF049145
HTG2174
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 160
4161
Features of your vehicle
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
CAUTION
• Use the power outlet only
when the engine is running
and remove the accessory
plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the
engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than 10A
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
WARNING
Do not put fingers or foreign
elements (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 161
Features of your vehicle
1624
Clothes hanger
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
ODMECO2038
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes,
because it may damage the
hook.
ODMECO2034
■ Type A ■ Type B
WARNING
The floor mat must be properly
anchored so that it will not
interfere with the operation of
the accelerator pedal. Any inter-
ference with the accelerator
pedal could cause the accelera-
tor pedal to be unable to return
to the idle position. A pedal that
cannot return to the idle posi-
tion could lead to an accident
which may result in severe per-
sonal injury or death.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 162
4163
Features of your vehicle
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod
®
port, you can use an aux port to con-
nect audio devices and an USB port to
plug in an USB and also in an iPod
®
.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
WARNING
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle, so that it will not
interfere with the pedal.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehi-
cle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weath-
er rubber mat on top of a car-
peted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal opera-
tion, HYUNDAI recommends
that only the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.
OANNCO43016
OANNCO43017
OANNCO43018
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 163
Features of your vehicle
1644
If necessary, contact your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to obtain a luggage
net.
✽✽
NOTICE
Vehicles equipped with a luggage
rail system may use the shackles to
hook the luggage net.
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
To use the cargo security screen
1.Pull the cargo security screen
towards the rear of the vehicle by
the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide
(2).
✽✽
NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen
with the handle in the center to pre-
vent the guide pin from falling out of
the guide.
WARNING
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path.DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
OANNCO43019
OANNCO43020
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 164
4165
Features of your vehicle
When the cargo security screen is not
in use:
1.Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2.The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.
✽✽
NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not
automatically slide back in if the
cargo security screen is not fully
pulled out. Fully pull it out and then
let go.
To remove the cargo security
screen
1. Push in the guide pin.
2.While pushing the lever, pull out
the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.
To remove the cargo security
screen from the luggage tray
1. Pull up the screen board.
2. Push in the guide pin.
3.While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.
OANNCO43021
OANNCO43022
ODMECO2039
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 165
Features of your vehicle
1664
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2. Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possi-
bly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the
vehicle and locate the weight
as forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed,
do not put luggage on it when it
is used.
ODM042343
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 166
4167
Features of your vehicle
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof oper-
ation.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
ODM042345
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 167
Features of your vehicle
1684
WARNING
• The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible onto the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
• The vehicle center of gravity
will be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers or high speeds that may
result in loss of vehicle con-
trol or rollover resulting in an
accident.
(Continued)
ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
(Continued)
• Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carry-
ing items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carry-
ing large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check fre-
quently before or while driv-
ing to make sure the items on
the roof rack are securely fas-
tened.
AN HMA 4B.QXP 3/5/2015 3:22 PM Page 168
4169
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
headlamp, your vehicle's audio
and electronic device may mal-
function.
• Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from
contacting the dashboard because
they may cause damage or discol-
oration.
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals.
AUDIO SYSTEM
OANNMM2901
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 169
Features of your vehicle
1704
Steering wheel audio control
The steering wheel incorporates
audio control buttons on the left hand
side of the steering wheel.
MODE (1)
Press the button to change audio
source.
PRESET/SEEK ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions based on the system
mode.
For the following functions the button
should be pressed for 0.8 second or
more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod
®
mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 second, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod
®
mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
VOLUME (VOL+/-) (3)
• Push the lever upward (+) to
increase the volume.
• Push the lever downward (-) to
decrease the volume.
MUTE (4)
• Press the button to mute the sound.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone call.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this section.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
ODM042327
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 170
4171
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle.This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM001
FM reception
JBM002
AM reception
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 171
Features of your vehicle
1724
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station.Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering.This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004 JBM005
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 172
4173
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
Caring for CDs
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permis-
sion. Use CDs that are created
only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 173
Features of your vehicle
1744
• Depending on the CD-R/CD-RW
manufacturer may not be compati-
ble and may not operate normally.
In such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
✽✽
NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❈❈
If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 174
4175
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to acci-
dents due to a lack of atten-
tion to external surroundings.
First park the vehicle before
operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product mal-
function. Continued use in
such conditions could lead to
accidents (fires, electric
shock) or product malfunc-
tions.
• Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehi-
cle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned off could result in
battery discharge.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 175
Features of your vehicle
1764
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not oper-
ate the audio system for long
periods of time with the igni-
tion turned off as such opera-
tions may lead to battery dis-
charge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause dam-
age to the LCD or touch
screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunc-
tion, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 176
4177
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static elec-
tricity when connecting or dis-
connecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device
is not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device format-
ted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be rec-
ognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in con-
tact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may
break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, discon-
nect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or
in another mode. (e.g, Radio,
CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 177
Features of your vehicle
1784
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory read-
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up impor-
tant data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory prod-
ucts which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone acces-
sories as they could cause dam-
age to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia termi-
nal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 178
4179
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
• Some iPod
®
models may not
support communication proto-
col and files may not properly
play.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPhone
®
3GS/4
- iPod
®
touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod
®
classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod
®
can be dif-
ferent from the order searched
in the audio system.
• If the iPod
®
is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the
iPod
®
. (Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate nor-
mally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology interface. The
device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
capability (such as for stereo
headphone Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology).
The device can play, but it will
not be controlled by the audio
system.
• To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod
®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod
®
/
iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone
®
, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not insert-
ed completely, communications
between iPod
®
and audio may
be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod
®
and the
audio system, the sound effects
of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equal-
izer function of an iPod
®
when
adjusting the audio system’s
volume, and turn off the equal-
izer of the audio system when
using the equalizer of an iPod
®
.
• When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable
from iPod
®
. Otherwise, iPod
®
may remain in accessory mode,
and may not work properly.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 179
Features of your vehicle
1804
✽✽
NOTICE -
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
• The Bluetooth
®
word, symbol, and
logo are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and
any use of such marks is under
license.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled callular
phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology.
• Bluetooth
®
Wirelss Technology
phone compatibility can be checked
by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com
and under the SERVICE & PARTS
- BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILI-
TY menu.
✽✽
NOTICE - BEFORE USING
THE
Bluetooth
®
HANDSFREE
What is Bluetooth
®
?
• Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-dis-
tance wireless networking technol-
ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect
various devices within a certain
distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive environments,
Bluetooth
®
allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls
with Bluetooth
®
mobile phones
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit www.
hyundaiusa.com.
✽✽
NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFE DRIVING
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a Bluetooth
®
phone
allows the user to conveniently
make and receive calls and use
contacts. Before using Bluetooth
®
,
carefully read the contents of this
user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 180
4181
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - WHEN CONNECT-
ING A
Bluetooth
®
PHONE
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or
turn on the Bluetooth
®
power
prior to searching/connecting with
the Head unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth
®
device, turn off the Bluetooth
®
fea-
ture within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
connection may
become intermittently disconnect-
ed in some mobile phones. Follow
these steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth
®
function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the Audio System and
try again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the
model of your mobile phone.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 181
Features of your vehicle
1824
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the opera-
tion of the voice recognition sys-
tem, pressing any key other than
the key terminate voice recog-
nition mode.
• For superior voice recognition
performance, position the micro-
phone used for voice recognition
above the head of the driver’s seat
and maintain a proper position
when saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to background noises
which may be picked up by the
overhead microphone:
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating and air condi-
tioning fan blower speed is high.
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 182
4183
Features of your vehicle
The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
Press the key in FM Radio screen
1. If you can find "FM <87.5~107.9>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-184 page)
2. If you can find "FM <89.1>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-315 page)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 183
Features of your vehicle
1844
■■
CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN, AM1B0DPAN
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 184
4185
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM/XM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
3.
• Changes to CD, USB (iPod
®
),
AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB (iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
4.
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume : Sets volume by turn-
ing the knob left/right
6.
• Radio Mode : Automatically
searches for broadcast frequen-
cies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previ-
ous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
• BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 185
Features of your vehicle
1864
7.
• Radio Mode
- XM Radio™ : Category Search
• MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
8. ~ (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9.
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
10.
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ XM Radio™ does not support the
Preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
11.
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
ting modes.
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time set-
ting screen.
12.
• Displays menus for the current mode.
13. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
SCAN
SCAN
6
1
SCAN
DISP
2
1
61
CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 186
4187
Features of your vehicle
❈ When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
14. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc
is inserted
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 187
Features of your vehicle
1884
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll] Set /
• : Maintains scroll
• : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
SETUP
Off
On
OffOn
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 188
4189
Features of your vehicle
Sound Settings
This menu allows you to set the
'Bass, Middle, Treble' and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Back : While adjusting values, re-
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Virtual Sound
The PoewrBass, PowerTreble, and
Surround can be set.
Select [Virtual Sound] Set menu
through
TUNE
knob Set /
through
TUNE
knob
• PowerBass : This is a sound sys-
tem feature that provides live bass.
• PowerTreble :This is a sound system
feature that provides live tremble.
• Surround : This is a sound system
feature that provides surround
sound.
❈ May differ depending on the selected
audio.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
Off
On
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 189
Features of your vehicle
1904
Blue Link
®
Voice Volume
(for Blue Link
®
equipped model)
Sets the Blue Link
®
voice recognition
volume.
❈ While using Blue Link
®
voice
recognition, turning the tune knob
will display the volume control
popup screen.
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
Clock Settings
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE
knob Press
TUNE
knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
3
SETUP
CLOCK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 190
4191
Features of your vehicle
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date
(MM/DD/YYYY).
Select [Calendar Settings]] Set
through TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through
TUNE
knob
Clock Display when Power is
OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)]
Set
/ through TUNE knob
• :Displays time/date on
screen
• :Turn off.
Off
On
OffOn
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 191
Features of your vehicle
1924
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
5
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 192
4193
Features of your vehicle
RADIO : FM, AM OR XM
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically
searches for the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequen-
cy increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• FM : Changes by 200KHz
• AM : Changes by 10MHz
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 193
Features of your vehicle
1944
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 194
4195
Features of your vehicle
XM RADIO
Using XM satellite™ Radio
Your vehicle is equipped with a
3 month complimentary period of XM
Satellite™ Radio. XM provides
access to over 130 channels of
music, information, and entertain-
ment programming.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key: select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈If the "Category" icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key: Previews
each broadcast for 10 seconds
each
❈Press the key again to con-
tinue listening to the current fre-
quency
❈If the "Category" icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the cate-
gory menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs
to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the
key to navigate category
list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the "CATEGORY"
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 195
Features of your vehicle
1964
Preset
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
frequency saved in the correspon-
ding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
61
61
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 196
4197
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟ USB
(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<CD MP3>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Press the
key): Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Press the key): Plays all
songs in random order.
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 197
Features of your vehicle
1984
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Press the key) :
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
iPod
®
mode: ALB RDM on screen
• Album Random (Press the key) :
Plays all files within albums of the
current category in random order.
MP3 CD, USB, iPod mode:ALL RDM
on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed
again within 3 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod
®
mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 198
4199
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 199
Features of your vehicle
2004
Folder Random
Press the key Set [
F.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [
A.RDM] through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play all songs
within the CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Album Random,
All Random, Information and Search
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Album Random
Press the key Set [ Alb.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays albums within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 200
4201
Features of your vehicle
All Random
Press the key Set [
A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 201
Features of your vehicle
2024
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 202
4203
Features of your vehicle
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [
Del.Sel] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the key and
select the delete menu.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
6
MENU
5
MENU
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 203
Features of your vehicle
2044
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
❈ Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Audio Streaming :
Press the key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob or
key Select [Audio
Streaming] through the TUNE
knob Set
/
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The play / pause functions may
not be supported in some mobile
phones.
MEDIA
Off
On
4
SETUP
On
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 204
4205
Features of your vehicle
PHONE
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion(IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone connection, set
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
PHONE
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mount controls
1) button : Activates voice recog-
nition.
2) button : Places and transfers
calls.
3) button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
➀Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering remote
controller .
➁The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
➂Press the key again to connect
a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering remote
controller.
➁The most recently called number is
redialed.
❈ If call history does not exist, a
screen asking whether to down-
load call history is displayed. (The
download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 205
Features of your vehicle
2064
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 206
4207
Features of your vehicle
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey :Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 207
Features of your vehicle
2084
✽✽
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a
new device or select [Connect] to
connect a previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
(Continued)
SETUP
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 208
4209
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only with devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 209
Features of your vehicle
2104
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect Phone].
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the high-
est priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 210
4211
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priori-
ty phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 211
Features of your vehicle
2124
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 212
4213
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Displays call history
list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 213
Features of your vehicle
2144
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 214
4215
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off with the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth
®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 215
Features of your vehicle
2164
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 216
4217
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
✽✽
NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 217
Features of your vehicle
2184
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select "Yes".
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 218
4219
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say "(BEEP)"
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 219
Features of your vehicle
2204
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
✽✽
NOTICE
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel con-
trol or a different key will end
voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say "cancel" or
"end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty under-
standing some accents or uncom-
mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including
first and last names) for these con-
tacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 220
4221
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
(BEEP)
Please say a command
after the beep (BEEP)
Beep Beep.. (end beep)
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 221
Features of your vehicle
2224
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 222
4223
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the XM, main-
tains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played XM screen.
XM (Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected XM screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~255
Audio
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 223
Features of your vehicle
2244
• FM/AM radio commands:Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 224
4225
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 225
Features of your vehicle
2264
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 226
4227
Features of your vehicle
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 227
Features of your vehicle
2284
Blue Link
®
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides
consumers with fast and reliable IT
technology. As consumers’ lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Blue Link is Hyundai's innovative
telematics solution that combines
safety, service, and infotainment into
a complete package. It works to both
help simplify Hyundai owners' lives
and reduce distracted driving. The
Blue Link "b" button offers access to
a voice-response menu of services.
The Blue Link POI button offers
access to enhanced navigation serv-
ices. The "SOS" button offers imme-
diate contact to SOS Emergency
Assistance. A detailed list of com-
mands is available in the Blue Link
User's Manual.
Using the Rear View Mirror
Buttons
Pressing the Blue Link buttons locat-
ed on the rear view mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
serv-
ice.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
ser-vice center employee.
Pressing the key again will end the
call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
"Navigate to" voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 228
4229
Features of your vehicle
2. Save Destination
"Save Destination" VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
✽✽
NOTICE
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature
supports the store of ten (10) desti-
nations in the TBT destinations
directory.
3. Route Preview
"Route Preview" VR command
allows the user to preview the route
instructions (upcoming maneuver
instructions) at any time during the
route guidance.
4. Destinations List
"Destinations List" VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
"Voice Guidance" VR command
allows the user to mute/unmute the
Turn by Turn (TBT) direction
announcements.
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn (TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn (TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Pressing
the key again will end the call.
If you are already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call, the call will end to connect
you to the Blue Link
®
Emergency
Rescue Center.
CAUTION
• You cannot talk simultaneous-
ly on the Bluetooth
®
phone
call and a Blue Link services
phone call.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call,
pressing the key or
key will display a message
indicating that you are cur-
rently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology call while already
on a Blue Link
®
call.To answer
the incoming call, press the
button on the steering
wheel controls. You will not
hear a ring to alert you that
there is an incoming call.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 229
Features of your vehicle
2304
Eco Coach
• What is Eco Coach?
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com-
pares your fuel economy against the
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (com-
munity), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill
up, Eco Coach rates your extended
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average.
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information.
• What does the bar graph and hori-
zontal line mean?
The horizontal line is adjusted once
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or communi-
ty average fuel economy target.
• What is My Eco MPG?
Your actual fuel economy average
over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your "now" rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?
If you beat the average (the EPA or
community), you will receive an Eco
Reward point.
See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 230
4231
Features of your vehicle
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1. Direction Indicator Image
2. Remaining distance until next point
3. The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name
5. Distance to destination
6. Expected Time Arrival
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please
refer to the Blue Link User's
Manual that was provided with
your vehicle.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 231
Features of your vehicle
2324
■■
CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN
❋No logo will be shown if the HD Radio
TM
feature is not supported.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 232
4233
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
(for HD RADIO
TM
equipped model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.
3.
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB (iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Press to turn power
on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to con-
trol volume.
6.
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequen-
cy.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
7.
• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change
• XM RADIO™ : Category Search
• CD/USB/MP3 mode : Search
Folder
HD/CAT
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 233
Features of your vehicle
2344
8.
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9.
Displays the time/date/day.
10.
• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes:
previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
11.
Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : turn to search
tracks/channels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc
is inserted.
14. RESET
• Forced system termination and
system restart.
Audio Head Unit
15.
• XM RADIO™ : Category Search
•CD, USB/MP3 mode : Search
Folder
CAT
FOLDER
SETUP
SCAN
CLOCK
DISP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 234
4235
Features of your vehicle
Steering remote controller
1.VOLUME
• Used to control volume.
2. MUTE
• Mutes audio volume.
3. SEEK
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broad-
cast frequencies saved to pre-
sets.
- Media (CD / USB / iPod
®
/ My
Music / BT Audio) modes :
changes the track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song (file)
- BT Audio mode may not be sup
ported in some mobile phones.
4. MODE
• Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟
XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
5.
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command wait-
ing state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 235
Features of your vehicle
2364
6.
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history
screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming
call screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call wait-
ing, switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree call, switches call
back to mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on
the mobile phone, switches call
back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree (Operates
only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree is con-
nected)
7.
•
Ends phone call
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 236
4237
Features of your vehicle
HD Radio
TM
Technology
(for HD RADIO™ equipped model)
HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents.HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and "Arc" logos are propri-
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
Program Service Data: Contributes
to the superior user experience of
HD Radio Technology.Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3
Channel Guide, and other relevant
data streams.
Adjacent to traditional main stations
are extra local FM channels. These
HD2/HD3 Channels provide new,
original music as well as deep cuts
into traditional genre.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio
Technology enables local radio sta-
tions to broadcast a clean digital sig-
nal. AM sounds like today’s FM and
FM sounds like a CD.
HD Radio
TM
signal delay
To overcome the delay that digital
systems inherently produce, HD
Radio™ technology first uses the
audio signal of the analog broadcast-
ing when you tune to an AM station
or to the main channel of a FM sta-
tion. After that, the system will blend
from analog to digital signal.
Normally, this blending is very
smooth. If you experience a skip in
program content of several seconds,
the radio station has not implement-
ed HD Radio™ broadcasting correct-
ly. This is not a problem with your
audio system.
Due to the fact that sub channels are
only broadcasting digital, blending
from analog to digital signal is not
possible if you tune to a sub channel.
In this case playback of the sub
channel starts after several seconds,
this is a normal function.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 237
Features of your vehicle
2384
RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. Info
Displays broadcast information.
6. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
7. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 238
4239
Features of your vehicle
HD RADIO MODE
(for HD RADIO
TM
equipped model)
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. HD Channel
Displays information for the currently
playing HD Radio broadcast.
3. Song Information
Displays the album, artist, and title
information.
4. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
5. HD Radio Broadcast Station
Displays the HD Radio broadcast
station name.
6. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
7. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
8. Info
Displays broadcast information.
9. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
10. A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 239
Features of your vehicle
2404
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by
10kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current frequency to the selected
preset.
61
61
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 240
4241
Features of your vehicle
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
✽✽
NOTICE
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the key will cancel the scan
operation.
Listening to HD Radio
Stations
HD Radio Technology is a digital
radio technology used by AM and
FM radio station to transmit audio
and data via a digital signal in con-
junction with their analog signals.
While listening to the radio, the HD
Radio icon will become displayed if
receiving an HD Radio broadcast.
Changing HD Radio stations
Press the button to change
HD Radio station.
Viewing Station Information
Press the button to view sta-
tion information.
Info
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
A.Store
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 241
Features of your vehicle
2424
XM RADIO™ MODE
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals
in the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
est.
• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered
by the XM™ repeater network.
✽✽
NOTICE
There may also be additional
unforeseen circumstances leading to
reception problems with the XM
satellite™ radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when start-
ing XM Radio™.
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 242
4243
Features of your vehicle
XM RADIO™ MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 243
Features of your vehicle
2444
Using SEEK
Press the key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Using Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
SCAN
Press the key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
10 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
()key and press
the TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a channel you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current channel to the selected
preset.
61
61
Preset
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 244
4245
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
DISCS
• This device has been manufac-
tured to be compatible with
software bearing the following
logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-
uids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to pre-
vent disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or
within the center hole to prevent
damages to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign sub-
stances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign sub-
stances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simulta-
neously.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When using CD-R/CD-RW
discs, differences in disc reading
and playing times may occur
depending on the disc manufac-
turer, production method and
the recording method as used by
the user.
• Clean fingerprints and dust off
the disc surface (coated side)
with a soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result
in disc slot jams or difficulties in
disc removal. Such discs may
also result in noise while play-
ing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending
on the disc manufacturer, pro-
duction method and the record
method as used by the user. If
problems persist, trying using a
different CD as continued use
may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this prod-
uct may differ depending on the
CD-RW Drive Software.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-
type CDs may not function in
the device. DATA discs cannot
be played. (However, such discs
may still operate but will do so
abnormally.)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-
gon-shaped) as such discs could
lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the
disc slot without removal for 10
seconds, the disc will automati-
cally be re-inserted into the disc
player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result
in recognition failure. (e.g. copy
CD-R, CDs with labels)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 245
Features of your vehicle
2464
MEDIA MODE
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD
➟
USB (iPod
®
)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are
two or more media modes turned
on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 246
4247
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
3.Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 247
Features of your vehicle
2484
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information
are displayed on the screen if
track information is included
within the audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current track
from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the track has been playing for 1
seconds will start the previous
track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 248
4249
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play tracks
in random (Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn
the Random (Shuffle) feature off.
• Random (Shuffle): Plays all tracks
in random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat :Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle
Info
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 249
Features of your vehicle
2504
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 250
4251
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the
(
) key to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 251
Features of your vehicle
2524
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the 'Folder File' option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the 'Album Artist Song'
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
files in Random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 252
4253
Features of your vehicle
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 253
Features of your vehicle
2544
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if
it is already connected when the
ignition is turned on.The USB
device may not operate properly
if the car ignition is turned on or
off with the USB device connect-
ed.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not
be recognized when connected
as an external device.
• When connecting an external
USB device, the device may not
properly recognize the USB is in
some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will
be recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT
12/16/32 file formats. This
device does not recognize files in
NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be
supported due to compatibility
issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector with bodily parts or
foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/discon-
necting of USB devices within
short periods of time may result
in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/discon-
nect external USB devices with
the audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may
differ depending on the type,
size or file formats stored in the
USB. Such differences in time
are not indications of malfunc-
tions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to
charge batteries or USB acces-
sories that generate heat. Such
acts may lead to worsened per-
formance or damage to the
device.
• The device may not recognize
the USB device if separately
purchased USB hubs and exten-
sion cables are being used.
Connect the USB directly with
the multimedia terminal of the
vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the
root drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate
if application programs are
installed to the USBs.
• The device may not operate nor-
mally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or
other electronic devices (USB
devices not recognized as
portable disk drives) are con-
nected with the device.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 254
4255
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products
that can also be used
as key chains or
mobile phone acces-
sories. Use of such products may
cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various chan-
nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/
USB mode may result in pop
noises or abnormal operation.
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile
devices.
• The device may not support
normal operation when using a
USB memory type besides
(Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
• The device may not support
normal operation when using
formats such as HDD Type, CF,
or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by
connecting an Adaptor (SD
Type or CF Type) may not be
properly recognized.
• The device may not operate
properly when using USB HDDs
or USBs subject to connection
failures caused by vehicle vibra-
tions. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 255
Features of your vehicle
2564
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 256
4257
Features of your vehicle
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional
time if there are many files and
folders within the USB and result
in faulty list display or file search-
ing. Normal operations will
resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 257
Features of your vehicle
2584
Searching Folders
Press the
(
)key
to select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the 'Folder File' option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the 'Album Artist Song'
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Info
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 258
4259
Features of your vehicle
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Folder : Plays
the files in the current folder in ran-
dom (Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
files in random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the cur-
rent file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 259
Features of your vehicle
2604
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while
operating the keys, you must use
a dedicated iPod
®
cable. (the
cable that is supplied when pur-
chasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
prod-
ucts)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds
immediately after connecting. If
possible, connect the iPod to the
vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connect-
ing the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable will charge the iPod
®
through the car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert
the jack to prevent communica-
tion interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an
external device, such as the
iPod
®
, and the audio system are
both active, EQ effects could
overlap and cause sound deteri-
oration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the
EQ feature within the external
device upon use by connecting
with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or AUX device is connected.
When such devices are not
being used, disconnect the
device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such
cases, disconnect the power con-
nection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone
®
, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated
when the iPod
®
cannot be recog-
nized due to versions that do not
support communication proto-
cols.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be
recognized when the battery
level is low. Please charge the
iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown with-
in the iPod
®
device may differ
with the orders shown within
the audio system.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to
an iPod
®
device defect, reset the
iPod
®
and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod
®
manual)
(Continued)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 260
4261
Features of your vehicle
iPod
®
MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-
plays the currently operating func-
tion.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
4. Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with
the System depending on its ver-
sion. If the Media is removed
before the Media is recognized,
then the system may not proper-
ly restore the previously operat-
ed mode. (iPad
®
charging is not
supported.)
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 261
Features of your vehicle
2624
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
iPod
®
s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the song has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
✽✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can
be searched, including Playlists,
Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,
Composers, Audiobooks and
Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 262
4263
Features of your vehicle
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
Home, and features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod
®
root
category screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed
while playing a song, the most
recently searched category is dis-
played.
• Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod
®
device.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 263
Features of your vehicle
2644
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random (Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play
songs in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Album ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Album : Shuffle
Album plays album in Random
(Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 264
4265
Features of your vehicle
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
• The AUX volume can be con-
trolled separately from other
audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the con-
nector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
MEDIA
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 265
Features of your vehicle
2664
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Delete
Deletes the current file.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 266
4267
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will
be disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
onds will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 267
Features of your vehicle
2684
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files
in random order. Press the button
again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 268
4269
Features of your vehicle
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individ-
ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
button and buttons
will be enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Select All: Selects all files
3) Unselect All: Deselects all select-
ed files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to
delete the selected files.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to [System] [Memory
Information].
SETUP
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 269
Features of your vehicle
2704
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone has been con-
nected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or mak-
ing an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interfer-
ence.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 270
4271
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected,
press the key [Phone] but-
ton to display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology connection
screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio is not operating
properly, check whether the fea-
ture is turned off at
[Phone] [Streaming Audio]. If the
feature is off, turn back on and try
again.
• If music is not yet playing from
your mobile device after converting
to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the
mode. Check to see that music is
playing from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device after
converting to Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 271
Features of your vehicle
2724
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing Key / Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter
the Pair Phone screen.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey :Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
OK
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 272
4273
Features of your vehicle
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
SETUP
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 273
Features of your vehicle
2744
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only with devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 274
4275
Features of your vehicle
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
Connect
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 275
Features of your vehicle
2764
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the high-
est priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priori-
ty phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Disconnect
SETUP
Change priority
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 276
4277
Features of your vehicle
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
Delete
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 277
Features of your vehicle
2784
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
3) Call History : Device the call histo-
ry list screen
4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
3)Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts
✽✽
NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 278
4279
Features of your vehicle
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered,
switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accept the incoming call
4) Reject : Reject the incoming call
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 279
Features of your vehicle
2804
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute :Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download :Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Download
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 280
4281
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been dis-
connected.
(However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off with the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth
®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
Download
PHONE
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 281
Features of your vehicle
2824
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 282
4283
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
✽✽
NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 283
Features of your vehicle
2844
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press "Yes".
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 284
4285
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller.Say
a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say "(BEEP)"
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the "beep", say the
voice command.
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 285
Features of your vehicle
2864
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
to call (BEEP)
Ding~
(BEEP)
Ding~
Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)
Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 286
4287
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
(Call by Name)
Voice Command List
• Common Commands:These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 287
Features of your vehicle
2884
Command Function
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the XM, main-
tains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played XM screen.
XM (Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected XM screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected XM channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~255
Audio
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 288
4289
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM
radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 289
Features of your vehicle
2904
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused track.
Pause Pauses the current track.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 290
4291
Features of your vehicle
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 291
Features of your vehicle
2924
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and
[System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 292
4293
Features of your vehicle
Text Scroll
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Text Scroll]
This feature is used to scroll text dis-
played on the screen when it is too
long to be displayed at once.
When turned on, the text is repeat-
edly scrolled. When turned off, the
text is scrolled just once.
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name
2)Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 293
Features of your vehicle
2944
Virtual Sound
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Virtual Sound]
This feature is used to set the Power
Bass, Power Treble and Surround
sound options.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Speed Dependent
Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed.SDVC can be set by selecting
from Off/Low/Mid/High.
Voice Recognition Volume
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Voice Recognition
Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
SETUP
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 294
4295
Features of your vehicle
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Blue Link Voice Volume
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice
Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Volume.
❈Blue Link
®
may differ depending on
the selected audio.
Clock/Calendar Setting
Clock Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
✽✽
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to set the Clock/
Calendar screen.
CLOCK
SETUP
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 295
Features of your vehicle
2964
Calendar Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Month, Day and Year setting.
Time Format
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Display (Power off)].
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
SETUP SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 296
4297
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
HD Radio™ On/Off
Press the key Select
[System] Select [FM], [AM]
This feature is used to set whether to
receive FM/AM HD Radio broad-
casts.
Prompt Feedback
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance
prompts
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 297
Features of your vehicle
2984
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
lever is set to R.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when set to a
different lever.
SETUP
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 298
4299
Features of your vehicle
Blue Link
®
(if equipped)
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides
consumers with fast and reliable IT
technology. As consumers’ lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Blue Link is Hyundai's innovative
telematics solution that combines
safety, service, and infotainment into
a complete package. It works to both
help simplify Hyundai owners' lives
and reduce distracted driving. The
Blue Link "b" button offers access to
a voice-response menu of services.
The Blue Link POI button offers
access to enhanced navigation serv-
ices. The "SOS" button offers imme-
diate contact to SOS Emergency
Assistance. A detailed list of com-
mands is available in the Blue Link
User's Manual.
Using the Rear View Mirror
Buttons
Pressing the Blue Link buttons locat-
ed on the rear view mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
serv-
ice.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
ser-vice center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
"Navigate to" voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 299
Features of your vehicle
3004
2. Save Destination
"Save Destination" VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
✽✽
NOTICE
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature
supports the store of ten (10) desti-
nations in the TBT destinations
directory.
3. Route Preview
"Route Preview" VR command
allows the user to preview the route
instructions (upcoming maneuver
instructions) at any time during the
route guidance.
4. Destinations List
"Destinations List" VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
"Voice Guidance" VR command
allows the user to mute/unmute the
Turn by Turn (TBT) direction
announcements.
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn (TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn (TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Re-press-
ing the key will end the call.
If you are already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call, the call will end to connect
you to the Blue Link
®
Emergency
Rescue Center.
CAUTION
• You cannot talk simultaneous-
ly on the Bluetooth
®
phone
call and a Blue Link services
phone call.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call,
pressing the key or
key will display a message
indicating that you are cur-
rently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology call while already
on a Blue Link
®
call.To answer
the incoming call, press the
button on the steering
wheel controls. You will not
hear a ring to alert you that
there is an incoming call.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 300
4301
Features of your vehicle
Eco Coach
• What is Eco Coach?
Every 2.5 minutes, Eco Coach com-
pares your fuel economy against the
government tested average (EPA) or
other similar Hyundai models (com-
munity), based on your preference.
Each month, or after every tank fill
up, Eco Coach rates your extended
average and gives you a reward star
if you best the average.
See your My Hyundai web page for
more information.
• What does the bar graph and hori-
zontal line mean?
The horizontal line is adjusted once
per month or at each tank full, based
on your preference; it represents the
EPA combined average or communi-
ty average fuel economy target.
• What is My Eco MPG?
Your actual fuel economy average
over 2.5 minutes.
This value is also shown in bar graph
as your "now" rating.
• What are Eco Rewards?
If you beat the average (the EPA or
community), you will receive an Eco
Reward point.
See your my Hyundai web page for
more information.
[Eco Driving] will not operate if the
vehicle ignition is not turned on.
Please operate with the ignition
turned on.
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 301
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1. Direction Indicator Image
2. Remaining distance until next point
3. The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name
5. Distance to destination
6. Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please
refer to the Blue Link User's
Manual that was provided with
your vehicle.
4 302
Features of your vehicle
AN HMA 4C (169~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/25/2015 2:05 PM Page 302
4303
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle.This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM001
FM reception
JBM002
AM reception
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 303
Features of your vehicle
3044
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station.Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions.This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listen-
ing conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering.This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004 JBM005
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 304
4305
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.
Caring for CDs
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permis-
sion. Use CDs that are created
only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 305
Features of your vehicle
3064
• Depending on the CD-R/CD-RW
manufacturer may not be compati-
ble and may not operate normally.
In such circumstances, continued
use may cause malfunctions to
your audio system.
✽✽
NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
✽✽
NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order : to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❈❈
If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 306
4307
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to acci-
dents due to a lack of atten-
tion to external surroundings.
First park the vehicle before
operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assem-
ble, or modify the audio sys-
tem. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product mal-
function. Continued use in
such conditions could lead to
accidents (fires, electric
shock) or product malfunc-
tions.
• Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to light-
ning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in park-
ing-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehi-
cle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the igni-
tion turned off could result in
battery discharge.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 307
Features of your vehicle
3084
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not oper-
ate the audio system for long
periods of time with the igni-
tion turned off as such opera-
tions may lead to battery dis-
charge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause dam-
age to the LCD or touch
screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunc-
tion, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system
within an electromagnetic
environment may result in
noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions
such as perfume and cosmet-
ic oil from contacting the
dashboard because they may
cause damage or discol-
oration.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 308
4309
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the
vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static elec-
tricity when connecting or dis-
connecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the
connected external USB device
can be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device
is not either 512BYTE or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device format-
ted to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be rec-
ognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in con-
tact with the human body or
other objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may
break the device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnect-
ing a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, discon-
nect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or
in another mode. (e.g, Radio,
CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a
difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Playing videos through the USB
is not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 309
Features of your vehicle
3104
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory read-
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD,
etc.) or external-HDD type
devices can be unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory
may be lost while using this
audio. Always back up impor-
tant data on a personal storage
device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory prod-
ucts which can be
used as key chains or
cellular phone acces-
sories as they could cause dam-
age to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products.
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia termi-
nal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported.
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 310
4311
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
• iPhone
®
is a registered trade-
mark of Apple inc.
• Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol
and files may not play properly.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPhone
®
3GS/4
- iPod
®
touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod
®
classic
• The order of search or playback
of songs in the iPod
®
can be dif-
ferent from the order searched
in the audio system.
• If the iPod
®
is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the
iPod
®
. (Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate nor-
mally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected
through the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology interface. The
device must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
capability (such as for stereo
headphone Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology).
The device can play, but it will
not be controlled by the audio
system.
• To use iPod
®
features within the
audio, use the cable provided
upon purchasing an iPod
®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod
®
/
iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone
®
, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the
connector to the multimedia
socket completely. If not insert-
ed completely, communications
between iPod
®
and audio may
be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound
effects of the iPod
®
and the
audio system, the sound effects
of both devices will overlap and
might reduce or distort the
quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equal-
izer function of an iPod
®
when
adjusting the audio system’s
volume, and turn off the equal-
izer of the audio system when
using the equalizer of an iPod
®
.
• When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable
from iPod
®
. Otherwise, iPod
®
may remain in accessory mode,
and may not work properly.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 311
Features of your vehicle
3124
✽✽
NOTICE -
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
• The Bluetooth
®
word, symbol, and
logo are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and
any use of such marks is under
license.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled callular
phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
wireless technology.
• Bluetooth
®
Wirelss Technology
phone compatibility can be checked
by visiting www. hyundaiusa.com
and under the SERVICE & PARTS
- BLUETOOTH COMPATIBILI-
TY menu.
✽✽
NOTICE - BEFORE USING
THE
Bluetooth
®
HANDSFREE
What is Bluetooth
®
?
• Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-dis-
tance wireless networking technol-
ogy which uses a 2.4GHz ~
2.48GHz frequency to connect
various devices within a certain
distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and
automotive environments,
Bluetooth
®
allows data to be trans-
mitted at high speeds without hav-
ing to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls
with Bluetooth
®
mobile phones
through the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones. To
learn more about mobile device com-
patibility, visit www. hyundaiusa.com.
✽✽
NOTICE - PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFE DRIVING
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a Bluetooth
®
phone
allows the user to conveniently
make and receive calls and use
contacts. Before using Bluetooth
®
,
carefully read the contents of this
user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv-
ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive
operations while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 312
4313
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - WHEN CONNECT-
ING A Bluetooth
®
PHONE
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth
®
, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth
®
power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or
turn on the Bluetooth
®
power
prior to searching/connecting with
the Head unit.
• Bluetooth phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
• If you do not want automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth
®
device, turn off the Bluetooth
®
fea-
ture within your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
connection may become
intermittently disconnected in
some mobile phones. Follow these
steps to try again.
1. Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth
®
function off/on
and try again.
2. Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3. Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4. Reboot the Audio System and
try again.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 313
Features of your vehicle
3144
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE Voice
Recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the opera-
tion of the voice recognition sys-
tem, pressing any key other than
the key terminate voice recog-
nition mode.
• For superior voice recognition
performance, position the micro-
phone used for voice recognition
above the head of the driver’s seat
and maintain a proper position
when saying commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to background noises
which may be picked up by the
overhead microphone:
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the heating and air condi-
tioning fan blower speed is high.
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands
can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book,
it takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice infor-
mation. During this time, voice
recognition may not properly
operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 314
4315
Features of your vehicle
■■
CD Player : AM1B2DMKN, AM1B3DMAN, AM1B0DPAN
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 315
Features of your vehicle
3164
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟
XM3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
3.
• Changes to CD, USB (iPod
®
),
AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB (iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
4.
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
• Volume : Sets volume by turn-
ing the knob left/right
6.
• Radio Mode :Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previ-
ous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-for-
wards the current song.
• BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 316
4317
Features of your vehicle
7.
• Radio Mode
- SiriusXM RADIO : Category
Search
• MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder
Search
8. ~ (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9.
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), it
sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
10.
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SiriusXM RADIO does not support
the Preset scan feature.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
SCAN
SCAN
6
1
SCAN
DISP
2
1
61
CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 317
Features of your vehicle
3184
11.
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System set-
ting modes.
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time set-
ting screen.
12.
• Displays menus for the current
mode.
13. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right.
• CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
14. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc
is inserted
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 318
4319
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select [Display]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
2
SETUP
CLOCK
MEDIA
RADIO
Off
On
1
SETUP
CLOCK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 319
Features of your vehicle
3204
Tone
This menu allows you to set the Bass
Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
Fader, Balance.
Select [Position] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Turn
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in [On / Off] of TUNE knob
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 320
4321
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
Blue Link
®
Voice Volume
(for Blue Link
®
equipped model)
Sets the Blue Link
®
voice recognition
volume.
❈ While using Blue Link
®
voice
recognition, turning the tune knob
will display the volume control
popup screen.
❈ May differ depending on the
selected audio.
Clock Settings
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
3
SETUP
CLOCK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 321
Features of your vehicle
3224
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE
knob Press
TUNE
knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings] Set
through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting.
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through
TUNE
knob
Clock Display when Power is
OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)]
Set
/ through TUNE knob
• :Displays time/date on screen
• :Turn off.
Off
On
OffOn
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 322
4323
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] through tune knob or
key Select menu through TUNE
knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
5
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 323
Features of your vehicle
3244
RADIO : FM, AM OR SiriusXM
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically
searches for the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequen-
cy increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
MENU
MENU
61
SCAN
61
61
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 324
4325
Features of your vehicle
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You'll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming.
For more information and a complete
list of SiriusXM channels, visit
siriusxm.com in the United States,
siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer. Vehicles that are
equipped with a factory installed
SiriusXM Satellite Radio system
include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio information
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 325
Features of your vehicle
3264
✽✽
NOTICE
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by SiriusXM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after
your trial, the subscription plan you
choose will automatically renew
thereafter and you will be charged
according to your chosen payment
method at then-current rates. Fees
and taxes apply. To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.sir-
iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available only
in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and
PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change. Sirius, XM and
all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 326
4327
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the key,
and tune to channel zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key: select
previous or next channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the "Category" icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key: Previews
each broadcast for 10 seconds
each
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈ If the "Category" icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 327
Features of your vehicle
3284
Category
Press the key Set through
the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the cate-
gory menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs
to.
• In the Category List Mode, press the
key to navigate category
list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the "CATEGORY"
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
Preset
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
frequency saved in the correspon-
ding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds):Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
✽✽
Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the key
Select [ Info] through the TUNE
knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
MENU
61
61
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 328
4329
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB (iPod
®
)
➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<MP3 CD>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Press the
key): Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 329
Features of your vehicle
3304
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Press the key): Plays all
songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Press the key) :
Plays all files within the current
folder in random order.
iPod
®
mode: ALB RDM on screen
• Album Random (Press the key) :
Plays all files within albums of the
current category in random order.
MP3 CD, USB, iPod mode:ALL RDM
on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed
again within 3 second, the previ-
ous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
2
RDM
2
RDM
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 330
4331
Features of your vehicle
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing
(Folder Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod
®
mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
MENU : Audio CD
Press the Audio CD mode
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current CD.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 331
Features of your vehicle
3324
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the MP3 CD / USB mode
key to set the Repeat, Folder
Random, Folder Repeat, All
Random, Information, and Copy fea-
tures.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod
®
, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 332
4333
Features of your vehicle
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Album Random,
All Random, Information and Search
features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Album Random
Press the key Set [ Alb.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Plays albums within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press Alb.RDM again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [
A.RDM] through the TUNE knob
or key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 333
Features of your vehicle
3344
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat
off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
• Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
• Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 334
4335
Features of your vehicle
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the key and
select the delete menu.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
6
MENU
5
MENU
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 335
Features of your vehicle
3364
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phone.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change
the mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will
start playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The play / pause functions may
not be supported in some mobile
phones.
❈ The title / artist info may not be
supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press to play previous or
next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
SEEK
TRACK
MEDIA
On
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 336
4337
Features of your vehicle
PHONE
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile
phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the first
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically con-
nected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle. If you do not want
automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone connection, set
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
PHONE
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mount controls
1) key : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
2) key : Places and transfers
calls.
3) key : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller .
- The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
- Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
- The most recently called number is
redialed.
❈ If call history does not exist, a
screen asking whether to down-
load call history is displayed. (The
download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 337
Features of your vehicle
3384
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 338
4339
Features of your vehicle
Pairing key / key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey :Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 339
Features of your vehicle
3404
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a
new device or select [Connect] to
connect a previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
SETUP
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 340
4341
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only with devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 341
Features of your vehicle
3424
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect Phone].
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 342
4343
Features of your vehicle
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the high-
est priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priori-
ty phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 343
Features of your vehicle
3444
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 344
4345
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Displays call history
list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 345
Features of your vehicle
3464
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 346
4347
Features of your vehicle
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Find a contact in an alphabetical
order, press the key.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been dis-
connected.
(However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off with the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth
®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 347
Features of your vehicle
3484
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 348
4349
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
✽✽
NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 349
Features of your vehicle
3504
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select "Yes".
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 350
4351
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say "(BEEP)"
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 351
Features of your vehicle
3524
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
✽✽
NOTICE
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel con-
trol or a different key will end
voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say "cancel" or
"end" to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Hyundai Voice Recognition
System may have difficulty under-
standing some accents or uncom-
mon names.
When using Voice Recognition to
place a call, speak in a moderate
tone, with clear pronunciation To
maximize the use of Voice
Recognition, consider these guide-
lines when storing contacts:
• Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
always use full names (including
first and last names) for these con-
tacts
• Do not use special characters
(e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.)
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 352
4353
Features of your vehicle
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say the contact name you want to call.
(BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like “FM”, “AM”, or “Satellite”.
You can also say a media source like “USB”, “My Music”, or
“iPod”.
Additionally, there are phone commands like “Contacts”,
“Call History”, or “Dial Number”.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like “FM”, “AM”, or “Satellite”.
You can also say a media source like “USB”, “My
Music”, or “iPod”.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
“Contacts”, “Call History”, or “Dial Number”.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
(BEEP)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 353
Features of your vehicle
3544
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Office” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Home” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Other” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 354
4355
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM (Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 355
Features of your vehicle
3564
• FM/AM radio commands:Commands available during
FM, AM radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 356
4357
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 357
Features of your vehicle
3584
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 358
4359
Features of your vehicle
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technologyaudio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 359
Features of your vehicle
3604
Blue Link
®
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
‘Connected Car Life,’ which provides
consumers with fast and reliable IT
technology. As consumers’ lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Blue Link is Hyundai's innovative
telematics solution that combines
safety, service, and infotainment into
a complete package. It works to both
help simplify Hyundai owners' lives
and reduce distracted driving. The
Blue Link "b" button offers access to
a voice-response menu of services.
The Blue Link POI button offers
access to enhanced navigation serv-
ices. The "SOS" button offers imme-
diate contact to SOS Emergency
Assistance. A detailed list of com-
mands is available in the Blue Link
User's Manual.
Using the Rear View Mirror
Buttons
Pressing the Blue Link buttons locat-
ed on the rear view mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
serv-
ice.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
ser-vice center employee.
Pressing the key again will end the
call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
"Navigate to" voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 360
4361
Features of your vehicle
2. Save Destination
"Save Destination" VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
✽✽
NOTICE
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature
supports the store of ten(10) destina-
tions in the TBT destinations direc-
tory.
3. Route Preview
"Route Preview" VR command
allows the user to preview the route
instructions (upcoming maneuver
instructions) at any time during the
route guidance.
4. Destinations List
"Destinations List" VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
"Voice Guidance" VR command
allows the user to mute/unmute the
Turn by Turn (TBT) direction
announcements.
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn (TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn (TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Pressing
the key again will end the call.
If you are already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call, the call will end to connect
you to the Blue Link
®
Emergency
Rescue Center.
CAUTION
• You cannot talk simultaneous-
ly on the Bluetooth
®
phone
call and a Blue Link services
phone call.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call,
pressing the key or
key will display a message
indicating that you are cur-
rently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology call while
already on a Blue Link
®
call.To
answer the incoming call,
press the button on the
steering wheel controls. You
will not hear a ring to alert you
that there is an incoming call.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 361
Features of your vehicle
3624
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1. Direction Indicator Image
2. Remaining distance until next point
3. The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name
5. Distance to destination
6. Expected Time Arrival
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please
refer to the Blue Link User's
Manual that was provided with
your vehicle.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 362
4363
Features of your vehicle
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Hyundai is
under license. SiriusXM services
require a subscription sold sepa-
rately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to con-
tinue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will
automatically renew thereafter
and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method
at then-current rates. Fees and
taxes apply. To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are
available only in the 48 contigu-
ous USA, DC and PR (with cover-
age limitations). SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a
trademark of Google, Inc.
BlackBerry is a registered trade-
mark of Research In Motion
Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the
property of their respective own-
ers. All rights reserved.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 363
Features of your vehicle
3644
■■
CD Player : AM9B2DMKN, AM943DMAN
❋No logo will be shown if the HD Radio
TM
feature is not supported.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 364
4365
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
(for HD RADIO
TM
equipped model)
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, XM1, XM2, XM3.
3.
• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB (iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
4. (for
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology equipped model)
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
5. PWR/VOL knob
• Power : Press to turn power
on/off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to con-
trol volume.
6.
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : continuously
changes the frequency. Upon
release, plays the current frequen-
cy.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
7.
• HD RADIO™ : Channel Change
• SiriusXM RADIO : Category
Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search
Folder
HD/CAT
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 365
Features of your vehicle
3664
8.
• Turns the monitor display on/off.
9.
Displays the time/date/day.
10.
• Radio Mode : previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds
each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes:
previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
11.
Converts to Setup mode.
12. TUNE knob
• Radio mode : turn to change
broadcast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : turn to search tracks/
channels/files.
13. DISC-IN LED
• LED that indicates whether a disc
is inserted.
14. RESET
• Forced system termination and
system restart.
Audio Head Unit
15.
• SiriusXM RADIO : Category
Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search
Folder
CAT
FOLDER
SETUP
SCAN
CLOCK
DISP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 366
4367
Features of your vehicle
Steering remote controller
1.VOLUME
• Used to control volume.
2. MUTE
• Mutes audio volume.
3. SEEK
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broad-
cast frequencies saved to pre-
sets.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music/
BT Audio) modes : changes the
track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels
- Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song (file)
- BT Audio mode may not be sup
ported in some mobile phones.
4. MODE
• Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟
XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
5.
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command wait-
ing state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 367
Features of your vehicle
3684
6.
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back
to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
7.
• Ends phone call
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 368
4369
Features of your vehicle
HD Radio
TM
Technology
(for HD RADIO™ equipped model)
HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents.HD Radio™ and the HD, HD
Radio, and "Arc" logos are propri-
etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
Program Service Data: Contributes
to the superior user experience of
HD Radio Technology.Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3
Channel Guide, and other relevant
data streams.
Adjacent to traditional main stations
are extra local FM channels. These
HD2/HD3 Channels provide new,
original music as well as deep cuts
into traditional genre.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio
Technology enables local radio sta-
tions to broadcast a clean digital sig-
nal. AM sounds like today’s FM and
FM sounds like a CD.
HD Radio
TM
signal delay
To overcome the delay that digital
systems inherently produce, HD
Radio™ technology first uses the
audio signal of the analog broadcast-
ing when you tune to an AM station
or to the main channel of a FM sta-
tion. After that, the system will blend
from analog to digital signal.
Normally, this blending is very
smooth. If you experience a skip in
program content of several seconds,
the radio station has not implement-
ed HD Radio™ broadcasting correct-
ly. This is not a problem with your
audio system.
Due to the fact that sub channels are
only broadcasting digital, blending
from analog to digital signal is not
possible if you tune to a sub channel.
In this case playback of the sub
channel starts after several seconds,
this is a normal function.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 369
Features of your vehicle
3704
RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number [1] ~
[6].
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. Info
Displays broadcast information.
6. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
7. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 370
4371
Features of your vehicle
HD RADIO MODE
(for HD RADIO
TM
equipped model)
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. HD Channel
Displays information for the currently
playing HD Radio broadcast.
3. Song Information
Displays the album, artist, and title
information.
4. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
5. HD Radio Broadcast Station
Displays the HD Radio broadcast
station name.
6. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
7. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
8. Info
Displays broadcast information.
9. HD
Changes HD Radio channels.
10. A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 371
Features of your vehicle
3724
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟ XM3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
• FM : Increases/decreased by
200kHz
• AM : Increases/decreased by
10kHz
Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current frequency to the selected
preset.
61
61
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
SETUP
RADIO
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 372
4373
Features of your vehicle
Auto Store
Press the button to automati-
cally save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.
✽✽
NOTICE
While Auto Store is operating, press-
ing the [Cancel] button again will
cancel Auto Store and restore the
previous frequency.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the key will cancel the scan
operation.
Listening to HD Radio
Stations
HD Radio Technology is a digital
radio technology used by AM and
FM radio station to transmit audio
and data via a digital signal in con-
junction with their analog signals.
While listening to the radio, the HD
Radio icon will become displayed if
receiving an HD Radio broadcast.
Changing HD Radio stations
Press the button to change
HD Radio station.
Viewing Station Information
Press the button to view sta-
tion information.
Info
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
A.Store
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 373
Features of your vehicle
3744
XM RADIO™ MODE
Features of your vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals
in the following situations.
• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-
cle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks
block the signal from the satellite.
• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense for-
est.
• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered
by the XM™ repeater network.
✽✽
NOTICE
There may also be additional
unforeseen circumstances leading to
reception problems with the XM
satellite™ radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when start-
ing XM Radio™.
SATELLITE2
SATELLITE1
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 374
4375
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package.You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium program-
ming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception fac-
tors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
buildup and keep luggage and
other
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer con-
nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 375
Features of your vehicle
3764
✽✽
NOTICE
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by SiriusXM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after
your trial, the subscription plan you
choose will automatically renew
thereafter and you will be charged
according to your chosen payment
method at then-current rates. Fees
and taxes apply. To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.
See SiriusXM Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.sir-
iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite
and data services are available only
in the 48 contiguous USA, DC and
PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change. Sirius, XM and
all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 376
4377
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number [1] ~ [6].
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped
with a 3-month trial subscription to
SiriusXM so you have access to over
140 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
Using SEEK
Press the key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈ If the "Category" icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Using Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
SEEK
TRACK
RADIO
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 377
Features of your vehicle
3784
SCAN
Press the key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
10 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
()key and press
the TUNE knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
✽✽
Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a channel you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current channel to the selected
preset.
61
61
Preset
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 378
4379
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
DISCS
• This device has been manufac-
tured to be compatible with
software bearing the following
logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liq-
uids, benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc
back in its original case to pre-
vent disc scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or
within the center hole to prevent
damages to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign sub-
stances into the disc insert/eject
slot. Introducing foreign sub-
stances could damage the device
interior.
• Do not insert two discs simulta-
neously.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When using CD-R/CD-RW
discs, differences in disc reading
and playing times may occur
depending on the disc manufac-
turer, production method and
the recording method as used by
the user.
• Clean fingerprints and dust off
the disc surface (coated side)
with a soft cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result
in disc slot jams or difficulties in
disc removal. Such discs may
also result in noise while play-
ing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may
not properly operate depending
on the disc manufacturer, pro-
duction method and the record
method as used by the user. If
problems persist, trying using a
different CD as continued use
may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this prod-
uct may differ depending on the
CD-RW Drive Software.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-
type CDs may not function in
the device. DATA discs cannot
be played. (However, such discs
may still operate but will do so
abnormally.)
• Do not use abnormally shaped
discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa-
gon-shaped) as such discs could
lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the
disc slot without removal for 10
seconds, the disc will automati-
cally be re-inserted into the disc
player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are
supported. Other discs may
result in recognition failure.
(e.g. copy CD-R, CDs with
labels)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 379
Features of your vehicle
3804
MEDIA MODE
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD ➟
USB (iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟
BT Audio.
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
[Display], then pressing the
key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media mode pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are
two or more media modes turned
on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology, iPod
®
, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
MEDIA
SETUP
MEDIA
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 380
4381
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/ Scan,
displays the currently operating func-
tion.
3.Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 381
Features of your vehicle
3824
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-
R, CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information
are displayed on the screen if
track information is included
within the audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current track
from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the track has been playing for 1
second will start the previous
track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 382
4383
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play tracks
in random (Shuffle) order.
Press the button again to turn
the Random (Shuffle) feature off.
• Random (Shuffle): Plays all tracks
in random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat :Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle
Info
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 383
Features of your vehicle
3844
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 384
4385
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and fold-
ers within the disc, reading time
could take more than 10 seconds
and the list may not be displayed or
song searches may not operate.
Once loading is complete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
ond will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 385
Features of your vehicle
3864
Searching Folders
Press the
(
) key to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Info
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 386
4387
Features of your vehicle
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Folder : Plays all
files within the current folder in
Random (Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
files in Random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 387
Features of your vehicle
3884
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• Connect the USB device after
turning on the engine. The USB
device may become damaged if
it is already connected when the
ignition is turned on.The USB
device may not operate properly
if the car ignition is turned on or
off with the USB device connect-
ed.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting
USB devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not
be recognized when connected
as an external device.
• When connecting an external
USB device, the device may not
properly recognize the USB is in
some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will
be recognized.
• This device recognizes USB
devices formatted in FAT
12/16/32 file formats. This
device does not recognize files in
NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be
supported due to compatibility
issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB
connector with bodily parts or
foreign objects.
• Repeated connecting/discon-
necting of USB devices within
short periods of time may result
in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when
disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/discon-
nect external USB devices with
the audio power turned off.
• The amount of time required to
recognize the USB device may
differ depending on the type,
size or file formats stored in the
USB. Such differences in time
are not indications of malfunc-
tions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not
supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to
charge batteries or USB acces-
sories that generate heat. Such
acts may lead to worsened per-
formance or damage to the
device.
• The device may not recognize
the USB device if separately
purchased USB hubs and exten-
sion cables are being used.
Connect the USB directly with
the multimedia terminal of the
vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the
root drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate
if application programs are
installed to the USBs.
• The device may not operate nor-
mally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or
other electronic devices (USB
devices not recognized as
portable disk drives) are con-
nected with the device.
(Continued)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 388
4389
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products
that can also be used
as key chains or
mobile phone acces-
sories. Use of such products may
cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various chan-
nels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/
USB mode may result in pop
noises or abnormal operation.
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile
devices.
• The device may not support
normal operation when using a
USB memory type besides
(Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
• The device may not support
normal operation when using
formats such as HDD Type, CF,
or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by
connecting an Adaptor (SD
Type or CF Type) may not be
properly recognized.
• The device may not operate
properly when using USB HDDs
or USBs subject to connection
failures caused by vehicle vibra-
tions. (e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 389
Features of your vehicle
3904
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 390
4391
Features of your vehicle
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional
time if there are many files and
folders within the USB and result
in faulty list display or file search-
ing. Normal operations will
resume once loading is complete.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using a USB
memory type besides (Metal
Cover Type) USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
ond will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 391
Features of your vehicle
3924
Searching Folders
Press the
(
)key
to select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random(Shuffle),
Repeat, Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the 'Folder File' option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the 'Album Artist Song'
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation are recorded within the
MP3 file ID3 tag.
Info
CAT
FOLDER
HD/CAT
FOLDER
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 392
4393
Features of your vehicle
Random(Shuffle)
Press the button to play files
in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Folder ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Folder : Plays
the files in the current folder in ran-
dom (Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
files in random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat (Icon) : Repeats the cur-
rent file.
• Repeat Folder (Icon) : Repeats all
files within the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select 'Yes'.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 393
Features of your vehicle
3944
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE iPod
®
DEVICE
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark
of Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while
operating the keys, you must use
a dedicated iPod
®
cable. (the
cable that is supplied when pur-
chasing iPod
®
/iPhone
®
prod-
ucts)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds
immediately after connecting. If
possible, connect the iPod to the
vehicle with the iPod
®
stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connect-
ing the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable will charge the iPod
®
through the car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert
the jack to prevent communica-
tion interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an
external device, such as the
iPod
®
, and the audio system are
both active, EQ effects could
overlap and cause sound deteri-
oration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the
EQ feature within the external
device upon use by connecting
with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or AUX device is connected.
When such devices are not
being used, disconnect the
device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such
cases, disconnect the power con-
nection before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the
characteristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone
®
, select the Dock
connector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology to change
the sound output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated
when the iPod
®
cannot be recog-
nized due to versions that do not
support communication proto-
cols.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be
recognized when the battery
level is low. Please charge the
iPod
®
for use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod
®
device may differ with
the orders shown within the
audio system.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to
an iPod
®
device defect, reset the
iPod
®
and try again. (To learn
more, refer to your iPod
®
manual)
(Continued)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 394
4395
Features of your vehicle
iPod
®
MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle), dis-
plays the currently operating func-
tion.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
4. Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
s may not sync with
the System depending on its ver-
sion. If the Media is removed
before the Media is recognized,
then the system may not proper-
ly restore the previously operat-
ed mode. (iPad
®
charging is not
supported.)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 395
Features of your vehicle
3964
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
iPod
®
s with unsupported communi-
cation protocols may not properly
operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 sec-
onds will start the current song
from the beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the song has been playing for 1 sec-
ond will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
✽✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can
be searched, including Playlists,
Artists, Albums, Genres, Songs,
Composers, Audiobooks and
Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 396
4397
Features of your vehicle
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
Home, and features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod
®
root
category screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed
while playing a song, the most
recently searched category is dis-
played.
• Search steps upon initial connec-
tion may differ depending on the
type of iPod
®
device.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 397
Features of your vehicle
3984
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Random (Shuffle),
Repeat and List features.
Random (Shuffle)
Press the button to play
songs in random (Shuffle) order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Random
(Shuffle) Album ➟ Random (Shuffle)
All ➟ Off.
• Random (Shuffle) Album : Shuffle
Album plays album in Random
(Shuffle) order.
• Random (Shuffle) All : Plays all
songs in Random (Shuffle) order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 398
4399
Features of your vehicle
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select [AUX]
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (cam-
corder, car VCR, etc.) has been
connected.
• The AUX volume can be con-
trolled separately from other
audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the con-
nector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, play-
ing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
MEDIA
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 399
Features of your vehicle
4004
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Random(Shuffle)/
Scan, displays the currently operat-
ing function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Random(Shuffle)
Turns the Random(Shuffle) feature
on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Delete
Deletes the current file.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 400
4401
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the [My Music] button will
be disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before
the file has been playing for 1 sec-
ond will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 401
Features of your vehicle
4024
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Random (Shuffle),
Repeat, Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion is recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Random
Press the button to play files
in random order. Press the button
again to turn the Random feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 402
4403
Features of your vehicle
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individ-
ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
button and buttons
will be enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Select All: Selects all files
3) Unselect All: Deselects all select-
ed files
4) Delete: Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to
delete the selected files.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go
to [System] [Memory
Information].
SETUP
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 403
Features of your vehicle
4044
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only
when a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone has been con-
nected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones
that do not support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio is playing, if the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone is connected, then the music
will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio mode may
result in pop noises in some mobile
phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or
making an outgoing call while
playing Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio may result in
audio interference.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 404
4405
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key [Phone] button to
display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
✽✽
NOTICE
If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play but-
ton once may start playing the
mode. Check to see that music is
playing from the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device after
converting to Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 405
Features of your vehicle
4064
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
Pairing key / key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter
the Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey :Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
OK
PHONE
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 406
4407
Features of your vehicle
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Hear, enter the passkey "0000" to
pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the following
screen. Press the [Pair] button to
pair a new device or press the
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
SETUP
PHONE
(For USA)
(For CANADA)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 407
Features of your vehicle
4084
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the
vehicle are as follows. Some fea-
tures may not be supported
depending on your Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connect-
ed at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth audio related features
are supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only with devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of com-
munication range, turning the
device OFF, or a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically searched
and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 408
4409
Features of your vehicle
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
SETUP
Connect
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 409
Features of your vehicle
4104
From the paired phone list, select the
phone you want to switch to the high-
est priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priori-
ty phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Disconnect
SETUP
Change priority
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 410
4411
Features of your vehicle
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
Delete
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 411
Features of your vehicle
4124
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts saved for easy access
2) Call History : Device the call histo-
ry list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history
data, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed
which asks to download contacts
data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
3)Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts
✽✽
NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
PHONE
PHONE
(For USA)
(For CANADA)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 412
4413
Features of your vehicle
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download :Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in
the call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
Download
PHONE
Download
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 413
Features of your vehicle
4144
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been dis-
connected.
(However, the contacts and call
history saved to the phone will be
deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the
contact download feature has been
turned off with the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts.
If downloading does not normally
occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth
®
devices and function support,
refer to your phone’s user manual.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 414
4415
Features of your vehicle
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select [Dial
Number]
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2)Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number If no
number has been entered, switch-
es to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
PHONE
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 415
Features of your vehicle
4164
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute :Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
"Pairing through Phone Setup" sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
SETUP
(For USA)
(For CANADA)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 416
4417
Features of your vehicle
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
"Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection" section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2)Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone
3)Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile
phone supports the download fea-
ture.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not oper-
ate while contacts are being down-
loaded.
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 417
Features of your vehicle
4184
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
✽✽
NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and press "Yes".
SETUP
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
SETUP
(For USA)
(For CANADA)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 418
4419
Features of your vehicle
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller.Say
a command.
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say "(BEEP)"
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4)Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the "beep", say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep ton will
sound. After the "beep", say the
voice command.
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 419
Features of your vehicle
4204
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say the contact name you want to call.
(BEEP)
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like “FM”, “AM”, or “Satellite”.
You can also say a media source like “USB”, “My Music”, or
“iPod”.
Additionally, there are phone commands like “Contacts”,
“Call History”, or “Dial Number”.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like “FM”, “AM”, or “Satellite”.
You can also say a media source like “USB”, “My
Music”, or “iPod”.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
“Contacts”, “Call History”, or “Dial Number”.
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Please say a...
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
(BEEP)
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 420
4421
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Mobile” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Office” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Home” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
“Other” in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith” on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”, “Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
XM1
➟
XM2
➟
XM3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
(Call by Name)
Voice Command List
• Common Commands:These commands can be used in most operations.
(However a few commands may not be available during certain operations)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 421
Features of your vehicle
4224
Command Function
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM (Satellite) 1~3
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
XM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 422
4423
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio commands: available during FM, AM
radio operation
• Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
Command Function
Channel 0~255 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 423
Features of your vehicle
4244
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD / USB commands:Commands available dur-
ing USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused track.
Pause Pauses the current track.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 424
4425
Features of your vehicle
• iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 425
Features of your vehicle
4264
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound],
[Clock/Calendar], [Phone] and
[System].
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Daylight, or
Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Daylight : Always maintains the
brightness on high
3) Night: Always maintains the
brightness on low
Pop-up Mode
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]
This feature is used to display the
Pop-up Mode screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Pop-up Mode screen.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media Pop-up Mode screen can
be displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
SETUP
Default
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 426
4427
Features of your vehicle
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name
2)Album Artist Song : Displays
album name/artist name/song
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
Default
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 427
Features of your vehicle
4284
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed.SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Voice Recognition Volume
Press the key Select [Sound]
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen
Beep]
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 428
4429
Features of your vehicle
Blue Link Voice Volume
Press the key Select
[Sound] Select [Blue Link Voice
Vol.]
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Blue Link Voice Volume.
❈Blue Link
®
may differ depending on
the selected audio.
Clock/Calendar Setting
Clock Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
✽✽
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to set the Clock/
Calendar screen.
Calendar Setting
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar
Settings]
Use the , buttons to set the
Month, Day and Year setting.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 429
Features of your vehicle
4304
Time Format
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
Press the key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Clock
Display (Power off)].
This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio sys-
tem is turned off.
SETUP SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 430
4431
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
HD Radio™ On/Off
Press the key Select
[System] Select [FM], [AM]
This feature is used to set whether to
receive FM/AM HD Radio broad-
casts.
Prompt Feedback
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recogni-
tion, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance
prompts
Language
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Language]
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed languaxge.
SETUP SETUP
SETUP
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 431
Features of your vehicle
4324
Memory Information
Press the key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
REAR VIEW CAMERA
(if equipped)
• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for user
safety by allowing a wider rear
range of vision.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the transmission
lever is set to R.
• The rear view camera will automat-
ically stop operating when set to a
different lever.
SETUP
CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider range of vision
and may appear different from
the actual distance. For safety,
directly check the rear and
left/right sides.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 432
4433
Features of your vehicle
Blue Link
®
(if equipped)
Hyundai aims to offer differentiated
customer values through a
'Connected Car Life', which provides
consumers with fast and reliable IT
technology. As consumers’ lifestyles
become more and more mobile in
thanks to remarkable advances in
smart phones, tablet PCs and overall
wireless telecommunication, new
lifestyle patterns demand seamless
connection between one’s office,
home, outdoors and automobiles.
Blue Link is Hyundai's innovative
telematics solution that combines
safety, service, and infotainment into
a complete package. It works to both
help simplify Hyundai owners' lives
and reduce distracted driving. The
Blue Link "b" button offers access to
a voice-response menu of services.
The Blue Link POI button offers
access to enhanced navigation serv-
ices. The "SOS" button offers imme-
diate contact to SOS Emergency
Assistance. A detailed list of com-
mands is available in the Blue Link
User's Manual.
Using the Rear View Mirror
Buttons
Pressing the Blue Link buttons locat-
ed on the rear view mirror key will
allow you to make service required
inquiries, POI info searches, and
emergency rescues by connecting to
the Blue Link
®
Center.
Such features can be used only after
subscribing to the Blue Link
®
serv-
ice.
➀ (Blue Link
®
Center)
Makes requests for Blue Link
®
serv-
ice related inquiries and consulta-
tions.
A call is connected to the Blue Link
®
ser-vice center employee.
Re-pressing the key will end the call.
This feature does not operate when
you are on a Bluetooth
®
phone call.
➁ (Blue Link
®
for POI)
• Blue Link
®
for Voice command
Starts Blue Link
®
voice command.
Voice receiving voice guidance,
shortly press the button to convert to
voice command mode. Press and
hold the button to end voice com-
mand.
• TBT VR Commands
1. Navigate to
"Navigate to" voice command is used
to request the download of route
data for a new destination, saved
destinations, daily routes and previ-
ous destinations.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 433
Features of your vehicle
4344
2. Save Destination
"Save Destination" VR command is
used to assign a voice tag to the last
downloaded destination and store it
in a destination directory.
✽✽
NOTICE
The Turn by Turn (TBT) feature
supports the store of ten (10) desti-
nations in the TBT destinations
directory.
3. Route Preview
"Route Preview" VR command
allows the user to preview the route
instructions (upcoming maneuver
instructions) at any time during the
route guidance.
4. Destinations List
"Destinations List" VR command
allows the user to preview and delete
the stored destinations with their
associated voice tags in the Turn by
Turn destinations directory.
5.Voice Guidance
"Voice Guidance" VR command
allows the user to mute/unmute the
Turn by Turn (TBT) direction
announcements.
6. Suspend Route
"Suspend Route" VR command
allows the user to suspend and
pause Turn by Turn (TBT) route guid-
ance while in the guidance mode.
7. Resume Route
"Resume Route" VR command
allows the user to resume Turn by
Turn(TBT) route guidance.
➂ (Blue Link
®
for SOS)
In the case of an emergency,
requests for help to the Blue Link
®
center.
Call is connected to the Blue Link
®
emergency rescue center. Re-press-
ing the key will end the call.
If you are already on a Bluetooth
®
phone call, the call will end to connect
you to the Blue Link
®
Emergency
Rescue Center.
CAUTION
• You cannot talk simultaneous-
ly on the Bluetooth
®
phone
call and a Blue Link services
phone call.
• While on a Bluetooth
®
call,
pressing the key or
key will display a message
indicating that you are cur-
rently on a call.
• A message will be displayed if
you receive a Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology call while already
on a Blue Link
®
call.To answer
the incoming call, press the
button on the steering
wheel controls. You will not
hear a ring to alert you that
there is an incoming call.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 434
4435
Features of your vehicle
Turn by Turn
The Turn by Turn feature can be used
through Blue Link
®
.
1. Direction Indicator Image
2. Remaining distance until next point
3. The Count bar is divided into a
total of 9 levels.
9 Level 0.5mi 8 Level 0.4mi
7 Level 0.3mi 6 Level 0.2mi
5 Level 0.1mi 4 Level 400ft
3 Level 300ft 2 Level 200ft
1 Level 100ft
4. Next Street name
5. Distance to destination
6. Expected Time Arrival
7. Current Street name
❈ For information on specific
Blue Link
®
operations, please
refer to the Blue Link User's
Manual that was provided with
your vehicle.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 435
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital
device sold separately. The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Hyundai is under
license. SiriusXM services require a
subscription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after
your trial, the subscription plan you
choose will automatically renew
thereafter and you will be charged
according to your chosen payment
method at thencurrent rates. Fees
and taxes apply.To cancel you must
call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.
com.SiriusXM U.S.satellite and data
services are available only in the 48
contiguous USA, DC and PR (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM
satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All
fees and programming subject to
change.
Sirius, XM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
Android™ is a trademark of
Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a regis-
tered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos
are the property of their respec-
tive owners. All rights reserved.
4 436
Features of your vehicle
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 436
4437
Features of your vehicle
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one ormore of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authori-
ty to operate this equipment.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 437
Features of your vehicle
4384
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body.This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the
FCC.
AN HMA 4D (303~AUDIO 1).QXP 6/9/2015 4:25 PM Page 438
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
• Downhill brake control (DBC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Active ECO system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
5
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 1
Driving your vehicle
25
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,
open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death
by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.
If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the
engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in
an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn
into the interior.
If you must drive with the liftgate (tailgate) open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3.Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the
windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 2
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Section 7,
“Maintenance”.
53
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol,that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 3
Driving your vehicle
45
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Drunk driving is the num-
ber one contributor to the high-
way death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, percep-
tions and judgement. Driving
while under the influence of
drugs is as dangerous or more
dangerous than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, do not drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been drink-
ing or taking drugs. Choose a
designated driver or call a cab.
WARNING
All passengers must be proper-
ly belted whenever the vehicle
is moving. Refer to “Seat belts”
in section 3 for more informa-
tion on their proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 4
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• When you intend to park or
stop the vehicle with the
engine on, be careful not to
depress the accelerator pedal
for a long period of time. It may
overheat the engine or exhaust
system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden
stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possi-
bly causing an accident. Keep
all things in the vehicle safely
stored.
• If you do not focus on driving,
it may cause an accident. Be
careful when operating what
may disturb driving such as
audio or heater. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always drive safely.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 5
Driving your vehicle
65
Illuminated ignition switch
(if equipped)
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for
your convenience, provided the igni-
tion switch is not in the ON position.
The light will go off immediately
when the ignition switch is turned on
or go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft.The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
✽✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning
the ignition switch to the ACC posi-
tion, turn the key while turning the
steering wheel right and left to
release the tension.
OCM050001 OCM050002
KEY
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 6
57
Driving your vehicle
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position.The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch
to LOCK or ACC while the vehi-
cle is moving.This would result
in loss of directional control
and braking function, which
could cause an accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in P (Park), set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine
off. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement may occur if
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver’s
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 7
Driving your vehicle
85
Starting the engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 sec-
onds), then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
4. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake or the accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit,you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start, wait
5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-
ing the starter. Improper use of
the starter may damage it.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 8
59
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated engine start/stop
button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the engine start/stop button will illu-
minate for your convenience. The
light will go off after about 30 sec-
onds when the door is closed. It will
also go off immediately when the
theft-alarm system is armed.
Engine start/stop button posi-
tion
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the engine start/stop but-
ton with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position. When you press the engine
start/stop button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
engine start/stop button will not
change to the OFF position but to the
ACC position.
✽✽
NOTICE
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power
(ON), only when the vehicle is not in
motion.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
ODM052006
White
CAUTION
In an emergency situation while
the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and
to the ACC position by pressing
the engine start/stop button for
more than 2 seconds or 3 times
successively within 3 seconds.
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 9
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
Press the engine start/stop button
while it is in the OFF position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position for more than 1
hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the engine start/stop button
while it is in the ACC position without
depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the engine start/stop button in
the ON position for a long time. The
battery may discharge, because the
engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the engine
start/stop button with the shift lever in
the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) posi-
tion. For your safety, start the engine
with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
Not illuminated
Orange
Blue
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 10
511
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop
button without depressing the brake
pedal, the engine will not start and
the engine start/stop button changes
as follow:
OFF
➔➔
ACC
➔➔
ON
➔➔
OFF or ACC
✽✽
NOTICE
If you leave the engine start/stop
button in the ACC or ON position
for a long time, the battery will dis-
charge.
WARNING
• Never press the engine
start/stop button while the
vehicle is in motion. This
would result in loss of direc-
tional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement may occur if
these precautions are not
taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine
start/ stop button or any other
controls through the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in the area could
cause loss of vehicle control,
an accident and serious bodi-
ly injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver's
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 11
Driving your vehicle
125
Starting the engine
1. Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
3. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
It should be started without depress-
ing the accelerator pedal.
5. Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button
is in the ACC position or above, if
any door is opened, the system
checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the
“ ” indicator and a message
“Key not in vehicle” will appear on
the instrument cluster and LCD dis-
play. And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.The
indicator or warning will turn off
while the vehicle is moving. Always
have the smart key with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any per-
son who is unfamiliar with the
vehicle to press the engine start/
stop button or related parts.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere with
your ability to use the brake or
the accelerator pedal.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 12
513
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you cannot start the engine nor-
mally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button for 10 seconds
while it is in the ACC position. The
engine can start without depressing
the brake pedal. But for your safe-
ty always depress the brake pedal
before starting the engine.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the
vehicle is in motion, do not
attempt to move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position. If the
traffic and road conditions per-
mit, you may put the shift lever
in the N (Neutral) position while
the vehicle is still moving and
press the engine start/stop but-
ton in an attempt to restart the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not press the engine
start/stop button for more than
10 seconds except when the
stop lamp fuse is blown.
ODM052007
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 13
Driving your vehicle
145
Automatic transaxle operation
The highly efficient automatic
transaxle has 6 forward speeds and
one reverse speed. The individual
speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in Drive, depending on
the position of the accelerator pedal.
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
ODM052011
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the lock release button when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 14
515
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator lights in the instrument
cluster displays the shift lever posi-
tion when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the front wheels from rotating.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position; then set the parking
brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate
the engine in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline,
do not hold the vehicle sta-
tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral)
or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 15
Driving your vehicle
165
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at which
time the transaxle will automatically
downshift to the next lower gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Move the shift lever to
the P (Park) position and set
the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattend-
ed in a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while
the vehicle is in motion.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle”, in this
manual.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 16
517
Driving your vehicle
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P
(Park) position as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone, the
transaxle will upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When accelerating from a stop on
a slippery road, push the shift
lever forward into the +(up) posi-
tion. This causes the transaxle to
shift into 2nd gear which is better
for smooth accelerating on a slip-
pery road.
OANNDR2102
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 17
Driving your vehicle
185
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position to R.
3. Move the shift lever to R.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into R (Reverse) position with
the brake pedal depressed, continue
depressing the brake, then do the fol-
lowing:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock override access hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. If the ignition switch
is in any other position, the key can-
not be removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OANNDR4103
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 18
519
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into "P"
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill.This may be
extremely hazardous.Always leave
the vehicle in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down,
move the shift lever to sports mode
and shift to a lower gear.
• When using soprts mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower
gear.
• Always use the parking brake and
shift into P (Park) when parking the
vehicle. Do not depend on placing
the transaxle in P (Park) to keep
the vehicle from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a colli-
sion, an unbelted occupant is
significantly more likely to be
seriously injured or killed than
a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cor-
nering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver over-
steers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed
limits.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 19
Driving your vehicle
205
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, move the shift lever to D
(Drive) and release the parking
brake. Depress the accelerator grad-
ually while releasing the service
brakes.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation
the vehicle may suddenly move
forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing
injury or damage to nearby peo-
ple or objects.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 20
521
Driving your vehicle
Engine power can be delivered to the
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. AWD is useful when extra
traction is required, such as, when
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or
snow-covered roads. These vehicles
are not designed for challenging off-
road use. Occasional off-road use
such as established unpaved roads
and trails are OK. It is always impor-
tant when traveling off-highway that
the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those
conditions. In general, off-road con-
ditions provide less traction and
braking effectiveness than normal
road conditions. The driver must be
especially alert to avoid driving on
slopes which tilt the vehicle to either
side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the dri-
ver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and his or her passen-
gers.
Tight corner brake effect
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all-wheel drive vehi-
cles caused by the difference in tire
rotation at the four wheels.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Off road
driving
This vehicle is designed prima-
rily for on road use although it
can operate effectively off road.
However, it was not designed to
drive in challenging off-road
conditions. Driving in condi-
tions that exceed the vehicle's
intended design or the driver's
experience level may result in
severe injury or death.
CAUTION - AWD
When turning sharply on a
paved road at low speed while
in all wheel drive, steering con-
trol will be difficult.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 21
Driving your vehicle
225
✽✽
NOTICE
• When driving on normal roads, deactivate the AWD LOCK mode by pushing the AWD LOCK button (the indi-
cator light goes off). Driving on normal roads with AWD LOCK mode(especially, when cornering) may cause
mechanical noise or vibration. The noise and vibration will disappear when the AWD LOCK mode is deactivat-
ed. Some parts of the power train may be damaged by prolonged driving with the noise and vibration.
• When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the
front wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
ALL Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp
grades, off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy
roads, etc., to maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at
speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD
AUTO mode at speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the
vehicle decelerates to speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h),
however, the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK
mode again.
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle oper-
ates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles under nor-
mal operating conditions. However, if the system deter-
mines that there is a need for the AWD mode, the
engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels
automatically without driver intervention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehi-
cle moves similar to conventional 2WD vehicles.
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 22
523
Driving your vehicle
For safe all wheel drive opera-
tion
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehi-
cle.
• When you are driving up or down
hills drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution in going up or
down steep hills, since you may flip
your vehicle over depending on the
grade, terrain and water/mud con-
ditions.
WARNING - All wheel
driving
When conditions demand the
use of four-wheel drive, all func-
tions of your vehicle are
exposed to extreme stress.
Slow down and be ready for
changes in the composition and
traction of the surface under
your tires. If you have any
doubt about the safety of the
conditions you are facing, stop
and consider the best way to
proceed.Do not exceed the abil-
ity of yourself or your vehicle to
operate safely.
WARNING - Hills
Driving across the contour of
steep hills can be extremely
dangerous. This danger can
come from slight changes in the
wheel angle which can destabi-
lize the vehicle or, even if the
vehicle is maintaining stability
under power, it can lose that
stability if the vehicle stops its
forward motion. Your vehicle
may roll over without warning
and without time for you to cor-
rect a mistake that could cause
serious injury or death.
HILL1 HILL2
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 23
Driving your vehicle
245
• You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in a
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional 2WD
vehicles in choosing safe cornering
speed in AWD mode. For starters,
you must drive more slowly in
AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel firm-
ly when you are driving off-road.
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
• If you need to drive through water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground.You
could lose control of the steer-
ing wheel.
WARNING - Wind danger
If you are driving in heavy wind,
the vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity and requires
you to drive more slowly.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compartment
and wet the ignition system,
causing your vehicle to sudden-
ly stop. If this happens and your
vehicle is in a tilted position,
your vehicle may roll over.
ODMEDR2146
WARNING - AWD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners.The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional 2WD vehi-
cles,making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 24
525
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not drive through water if the level
is higher than the bottom of the vehi-
cle.
• Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water. Press
the brake pedal several times as
you move slowly until you feel nor-
mal braking forces return.
• Shorten your scheduled mainte-
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in section
7). Always wash your vehicle thor-
oughly after off road use, especially
cleaning the bottom of the vehicle.
• Since the driving torque is always
applied to the 4 wheels the per-
formance of the AWD vehicle is
greatly affected by the condition of
the tires. Be sure to equip the vehi-
cle with four tires of the same size
and type.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
If one of the front or rear wheels
begins to spin in mud, snow,
etc. the vehicle can sometimes
be driven out by depressing the
accelerator pedal further; how-
ever avoid running the engine
continuously at high rpm
because doing so could dam-
age the AWD system.
WARNING - AWD driving
• Avoid high cornering speed.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at high speed.
• In a collision, an unbelted per-
son is significantly more like-
ly to die compared to a person
wearing a seat belt.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to re-enter the
roadway. In the event your
vehicle leaves the roadway, do
not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 25
Driving your vehicle
265
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV). SUV’s have higher ground
clearance and a narrower track to
make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications.
Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles.An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
vehicles, any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily in off-road conditions.
Due to this risk, driver and passengers
are strongly recommended to buckle
their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is more likely to die
than a person wearing a seat belt.
There are steps that a driver can make
to reduce the risk of a rollover. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers, do not load your roof rack
with heavy cargo, and never modify
your vehicle in any way.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that is originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
ing, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control,an accident or
vehicle rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteris-
tics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelt-
ed person is significantly
more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 26
527
Driving your vehicle
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never engage the parking brake
while performing these tests.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-
porary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING - Jacked
vehicle
While a full-time AWD vehicle is
raised on a jack, never start the
engine or cause the tires to
rotate.
There is a danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to fall off the
jack and to jump forward or
rearward.
WARNING - Dynamometer
testing
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. This
is very dangerous as the vehi-
cle can jump forward and cause
serious injury or death.
OANNDR2900
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 27
Driving your vehicle
285
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been affect-
ed in this way.Always test your
brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them
lightly while maintaining a safe
forward speed until brake per-
formance returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position
of the brake and accelerator
pedal before driving. If you
don't check the position of the
accelerator and brake pedal
before driving, you may
depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It
may cause a serious accident.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 28
529
Driving your vehicle
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur when-
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
WARNING - Parking
brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs serv-
ice. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually
lose braking performance,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs,
do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads.
• Always replace the front or
rear brake pads as pairs.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 29
Driving your vehicle
305
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
Foot type
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Releasing the parking brake
Foot type
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
OCM050015
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking
brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emer-
gency situation. It could dam-
age the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
OCM050016
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 30
531
Driving your vehicle
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may be
a malfunction in the brake system.
Immediate attention is necessary.
WARNING
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely
positioned in P (Park) for
automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
W-75
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 31
Driving your vehicle
325
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
WARNING
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent
accidents due to improper or
dangerous driving maneuvers.
Even though vehicle control is
improved during emergency
braking, always maintain a safe
distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced dur-
ing extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for vehi-
cles equipped with an anti-lock
braking system or (Electronic
Stability Control System) may be
longer than for those without it
in the following road conditions.
During these conditions the
vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-
ered roads.
• With tire chains installed.
• On roads where the road sur-
face is pitted or has different
surface height.
The safety features of an ABS
(or ESC) equipped vehicle
should not be tested by high
speed driving or cornering.
This could endanger the safe-
ty of yourself or others.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 32
533
Driving your vehicle
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation warrants and allow
the ABS to control the force being
delivered to the brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 33
Driving your vehicle
345
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS. In this
case, however, your regular
brakes will work normally.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The ABS warning light will
stay on for approximately 3
seconds after the ignition
switch is ON. During that time,
the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may
have a problem with your
ABS. Contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
W-78
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an
icy road, and operate your
brakes continuously, the ABS
will be active and the ABS
warning light may illuminate.
Pull your vehicle over to a safe
place and stop the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 34
535
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunc-
tioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and inter-
venes in the engine management
system to stabilize the vehicle.
ODM052046
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. Electronic stability
control (ESC) will not prevent
accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious acci-
dents. Only a safe and attentive
driver can prevent accidents by
avoiding maneuvers that cause
the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESC installed, always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving - including driving at
safe speeds for the conditions.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 35
Driving your vehicle
365
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices.Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control.It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slip-
pery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
-
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 36
537
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC
OFF indicator light (ESC
OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control
function does not operate.It
means the traction control
function does not operate.
Brake control function only
operates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation,
press the ESC OFF button
(ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime
will sound. At this state, the
engine control function and
brake control function do not
operate. It means the car sta-
bility control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 37
Driving your vehicle
385
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
WARNING
The Electronic Stability Control
system is only a driving aid;use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved,
snowy, or icy roads. Drive slow-
ly and don’t attempt to acceler-
ate whenever the ESC indicator
light is blinking, or when the
road surface is slippery.
WARNING
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your origi-
nal tires.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 38
539
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detected changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS).This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM system will automatically
be deactivated if a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
the VSM system. If a malfunction is
detected, the ESC indicator light will
illuminate and remain on. If the ESC
indicator light ( ) or EPS warning
light remains on, take your vehicle to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 39
Driving your vehicle
405
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 18 mph (30
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
Downhill brake control (DBC)
(if equipped)
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
assists the driver when descending a
steep hill without the driver depress-
ing the brake pedal.It slows the vehi-
cle to under approximately 6.3 mph
(10 km/h) and lets the driver concen-
trate on steering the vehicle.
DBC defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition is turned on.
The DBC can be turned on or off by
pushing the button.
ODM052047
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability
Management system is not a
substitute for safe driving
practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. Always hold the steer-
ing wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to
operate according to the dri-
ver's input through steering,
acceleration, and braking,
even with the VSM opera-
tional. Always follow all the
normal precautions for driv-
ing at safe speeds for the con-
ditions - including driving in
inclement weather and on a
slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the
VSM system to malfunction.
When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 40
541
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates, the system has overheated or there is an operational problem.
The DBC will not activate. If the DBC yellow indicator light illuminates even though the DBC system has
cooled, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Mode
Indicator
light
Description
Standby
Green light
illuminated
Press the DBC button when the vehicle speed is under
25 mph (40 km/h).The DBC system will turn ON and enter the standby mode.
The system maintains the standby mode when vehicle speed is under approximately
38 mph (60km/h).
Activated
Green light
blink
In the standby mode, DBC will activate automatically under the following conditions:
• The incline is over a certain degree.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is not depressed.
OFF
Green light
OFF
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
• The DBC button is pressed again.
• The vehicle speed is over approximately 38 mph (60 km/h).
Temporarily
deactivated
Green light
illuminated
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
When the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 41
Driving your vehicle
425
✽✽
NOTICE
• The DBC does not turn ON in the
P (Park) position.
• The DBC may not activate if the
ESC (or ABS) is activated.
• Noise or vibration may occur from
the brakes when the DBC is acti-
vated.
• The rear stop light comes on when
the DBC is activated.
• Always turn OFF the DBC on nor-
mal roads. The DBC might acti-
vate from the standby mode dur-
ing abrupt cornering or driving
over speed bumps.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
(if equipped)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when the driver
begins to accelerate after a stop.The
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) pre-
vents the vehicle from rolling back by
operating the brakes automatically
for about 1.5 seconds. The brakes
are released when the accelerator
pedal is depressed or after about 1.5
seconds.
WARNING
• Unnecessary or unwanted
DBC activation may result in
an accident.
• On a very steep hill even
though the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal is depressed
the DBC may not deactivate.
WARNING
The HAC is activated only for
about 1.5 seconds, so always
depress the accelerator pedal to
begin accelerating after a stop.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 42
543
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
Good braking practices
• After being parked, check to be
sure the parking brake is not
engaged and that the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear.This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because it can result in the
brakes overheating and losing their
effectiveness. It also increases the
wear of the brake components.
WARNING
• Whenever you leave or park
your vehicle, always set the
parking brake as far as possi-
ble and fully engage the vehi-
cle's transaxle into the P (Park)
position. If the parking brake is
not fully engaged, the vehicle
may move inadvertently and
injure yourself and others.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 43
Driving your vehicle
445
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down.When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling.If your vehi-
cle is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required
by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position.This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet.If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the gear selector lever in P
(automatic transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on an
incline with the accelerator pedal.
This can cause the transaxle to
overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:20 Page 44
545
Driving your vehicle
1.Cruise indicator
2.Cruise set indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
ODM052024
WARNING
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illumi-
nated), the cruise control can
be switched on accidentally.
Keep the cruise control sys-
tem off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise
control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when driving on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed, for instance, driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-
covered) or winding roads or
over 6% up-hill or down-hill
roads.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the cruise control sys-
tem.
• Be careful when driving
downhill using the cruise con-
trol system, which may
increase the vehicle speed.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 45
Driving your vehicle
465
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
Cruise control switch
CRUISE :Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
ODMEDR2016 ODM052025
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 46
547
Driving your vehicle
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate. Release the accelerator
pedal at the same time. The
desired speed will automatically
be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it.Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by
1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this
manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down.Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time you
move the lever down (to SET-) in
this manner.
ODM052027
ODM052026 ODM052027
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 47
Driving your vehicle
485
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch located
on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 9 mph
(15 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel.You will return to your
previously preset speed.
ODM052028
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 48
549
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 25
mph (40 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
✽✽
NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
ODM052026
ODM052025
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 49
Driving your vehicle
505
The BSD (Blind spot detection) sys-
tem uses a radar sensor to alert the
driver while driving.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides information to
the driver.
1 BSD (Blind spot detection)
When a vehicle approaches you and
is detected in your blind spot area,
the system will warn you.
The warning range depends on your
vehicle speed. However, if your vehi-
cle is about 6 mph (10 km/h) faster
than the other vehicle, the system
will not warn you.
2 LCA (Lane change assist)
When a vehicle approaches you at
high speed, the system will warn you.
3 RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves rearward,
and the sensor detects an approach-
ing vehicle on either the left or right
side, the system will warn you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
• While driving, keep your eyes
on the road and be aware of
your surroundings even
though the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system is operat-
ing.
• The BSD (Blind spot detec-
tion) system is a convenient
feature designed to assist the
driver. However, do not rely
solely on the system to alert
you when vehicles are
approaching. Always pay
proper attention to your sur-
roundings and use caution
when changing lanes.
OAN053105
OVI053129L
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 50
551
Driving your vehicle
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the BSD (Blind spot
detection) system switch is pressed
with the ignition switch ON.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 18.6
mph (30 km/h) the system will acti-
vate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used, turn
the system off by turning off the
switch.
When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph
(30 km/h)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
boundaries of the radar system.
1st stage
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a yellow
warning light will illuminate in the
outside rearview mirror glass.
Once the detected vehicle moves out
of the boundary of the system, the
warning will turn off.
OVI053120
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 51
Driving your vehicle
525
2nd stage
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane.
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror housing and
warning alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch
back to its original position, the sec-
ond stage alert will be deactivated.
BSD sensor locations
The sensors are located on the
inside of the rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
OAN053104ONC055010
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 52
553
Driving your vehicle
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper.
The light on the switch and the sys-
tem will turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign substances on
the rear bumper.
After the foreign substances are
removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substances
are removed, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-
tem check.
If there is a problem with BSD, a
warning message will appear to noti-
fy the driver. If this occurs, have a
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Rear cross traffic alert
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
OVI053131
OAN054003/OAN054004
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAN054001/OAN054002
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 53
Driving your vehicle
545
Rear Cross Traffic Alert -
Operating Conditions
• When the ignition is ON, if you
press the BSD switch, the switch
indicator illuminates and the system
turns on.
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10
km/h) when the gear shift lever is in
R (Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
detecting range is 1.6 ~ 65.6 ft (0.5
~ 20 m).
If an approaching vehicle is within
the sensing range and is traveling
at a speed of 2.5 ~ 22 mph (4 ~ 36
km/h), the system will detect the
vehicle. However, the system sens-
ing range may vary based on the
surrounding conditions.
Always use good judgment and
pay attention to your surroundings
while driving even while using the
BSD system.
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound and the warn-
ing light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range from behind your
vehicle, moves in the opposite
direction away from your vehicle or
moves slowly, the warning is can-
celled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
❈ If the left or right side bumper of
your vehicle is blocked by a barrier
or another vehicle, the system
sensing ability may be limited.
WARNING
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror housing
will illuminate whenever a
vehicle is detected at the rear
side by the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surroundings of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
BSD (Blind spot detection)
system. Do not solely rely on
the system but check for your-
self before changing lanes.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
OVI053132
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 54
555
Driving your vehicle
Non-operating conditions
Driver's Attention
The driver must be extra cautious in
the following situations in which the
system may not assist the driver and
may not function properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
covered by rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle is
changed or altered such as when
the cargo area is loaded with heavy
objects, or has abnormal tire pres-
sure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, tunnel, animals etc.
- A large amount of metal materials
are near the vehicle, such as in a
construction area.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flatbed trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has been started at
the same time as the vehicle next to
it and the vehicle has started to
move.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
CAUTION
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if repair work
has been done near the sen-
sor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the sys-
tem may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• Conversely, if the road is very
wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 55
Driving your vehicle
565
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is very muddy or dirty
- The driver or passenger window is
very muddy or dirty
- The driver or passenger window is
tinted with a very dark tint
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 56
557
Driving your vehicle
Active ECO operation
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-
ciency by controlling certain engine
and transaxle system operating
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit and road
condition.
• When the Active ECO button is
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the
Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
it will remain on until the Active
ECO button is pressed again.
Active ECO does not turn off when
the engine is restarted. To turn off
Active ECO, press the Active ECO
button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, the sys-
tem will return to normal mode.
When Active ECO is activated :
• The engine noise may get louder.
• The vehicle speed may slightly be
reduced.
• The air conditioner performance
may be affected.
Limitation of Active ECO oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though there
is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill: The system
will be limited to gain power when
driving uphill because the engine
torque is restricted.
• When using sports mode:The sys-
tem will be limited according to the
shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds: The system will be limited,
judging that the driver wants to
speed up.
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM
ODM052050
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 57
Driving your vehicle
585
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To oper-
ate your vehicle as economically as
possible, use the following driving
suggestions to help save money in
both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever possi-
ble. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
Section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see
Section 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle.This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle.Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 58
559
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too
high a gear resulting engine buck-
ing. If this happens, shift to a lower
gear. Over-revving is racing the
engine beyond its safe limit. This
can be avoided by shifting at the
recommended speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING - Engine off
during
motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without the
engine running. Instead, keep
the engine on and downshift to
an appropriate gear for engine
braking effect. In addition, turn-
ing off the ignition while driving
could engage the steering wheel
lock resulting in loss of vehicle
steering which could cause
serious injury or death.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 59
Driving your vehicle
605
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehicle
is defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle
(SUV). SUV’s have higher ground
clearance and a narrower track to
make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications.
Specific design characteristics give
them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary vehicles. An advantage of the
higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, which allows you to
anticipate problems. They are not
designed for cornering at the same
speeds as conventional passenger
vehicles, any more than low-slung
sports vehicles are designed to per-
form satisfactorily in off-road condi-
tions. Due to this risk, driver and pas-
sengers are strongly recommended to
buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is more like-
ly to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an
accident.The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on
a vehicle equipped with ABS.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 60
561
Driving your vehicle
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first
turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around your front
wheels. Then, shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and any for-
ward gear in vehicles equipped with
an automatic transaxle. Do not race
the engine, and spin the wheels as lit-
tle as possible. If you are still stuck
after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible
damage to the transaxle.
WARNING - Rollover
As with other Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV), failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control,an accident or
vehicle rollover.
• Utility vehicles have a signifi-
cantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles.
• Specific design characteris-
tics (higher ground clearance,
narrower track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles.
• A SUV is not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as
conventional vehicles.
• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
• In a rollover crash, an unbelt-
ed person is significantly
more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt. Make
sure everyone in the vehicle is
properly buckled up.
WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide safe
ride and handling capability. Do
not use a size and type of tire
and wheel that is different from
the one that was originally
installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and perform-
ance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover and serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be
sure to equip all four tires with
the tire and wheel of the same
size, type, tread, brand and
load-carrying capacity. If you
nevertheless decide to equip
your vehicle with any tire/wheel
combination not recommended
by HYUNDAI for off road driv-
ing, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 61
Driving your vehicle
625
✽✽
NOTICE
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as
it may be more difficult to see at
night, especially in areas where
there may not be any street lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
OUN056051 OCM053010
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and
backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects
are anywhere near the vehicle.
During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward or backward as it becomes
unstuck, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 62
563
Driving your vehicle
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.Dirty or improp-
erly aimed headlights will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
1VQA3003
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 63
Driving your vehicle
645
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
1VQA1004
WARNING
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and
sudden tire failure leading to
accidents, injuries, and even
death. Always check the tires
for proper inflation before
driving. For proper tire pres-
sures, refer to section 8,
“Tires and wheels”.
• Driving on tires with no or
insufficient tread is danger-
ous. Worn-out tires can result
in loss of vehicle control, col-
lisions, injury, and even death.
Worn-out tires should be
replaced as soon as possible
and should never be used for
driving. Always check the tire
tread before driving your vehi-
cle. For further information
and tread limits, refer to sec-
tion 7,“Tires and wheels”.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 64
565
Driving your vehicle
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil:
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both engine coolant and
engine oil.
Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 65
Driving your vehicle
665
WINTER DRIVING
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur.You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front and your vehicle. Also, apply
the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire
will provide a greater driving force,
but will not prevent side skids.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check the state laws before fitting
tire chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
1VQA3005
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 66
567
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels.If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them
to the drive wheels as follows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for an AWD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
CAUTION
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to
the vehicle body and suspen-
sion and may not be covered
by your vehicle manufacturer
warranty. Also, the snow chain
connecting hooks may be dam-
aged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installa-
tion for proper mounting after
driving approximately 0.3 to
0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to
ensure safe mounting.
Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
1VQA3007
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 67
Driving your vehicle
685
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing.Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may
adversely affect vehicle han-
dling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30
km/h) or the chain manufac-
turer’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps,holes, sharp turns, and
other road hazards, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
WARNING - Mounting
chains
When mounting snow chains,
park the vehicle on level ground
away from traffic. Turn on the
vehicle Hazard Warning flashers
and place a triangular emer-
gency warning device behind
the vehicle if available. Always
place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before
installing snow chains.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 68
569
Driving your vehicle
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice.If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container.Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of anti-
freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 69
Driving your vehicle
705
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the shift lever in P (automat-
ic transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering.When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine com-
partment
Placement of foreign objects or
materials which prevent cooling of
the engine, in the engine compart-
ment, may cause a failure or com-
bustion. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the damage caused
by such placement.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 70
571
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your state’s Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
further details before towing.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many time-test-
ed, important trailering tips and safe-
ty rules. Many of these are important
for your safety and that of your pas-
sengers. Please read this section
carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also considerably adds
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
If you don't use the correct
equipment and/or drive improp-
erly, you can lose control when
you pull a trailer. For example, if
the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may not work well - or
even at all. You and your pas-
sengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only
if you have followed all the
steps in this section.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer
correctly, follow the advice in
this section.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 71
Driving your vehicle
725
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory is
available at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
federal and/or local regulations and
that it is properly installed and oper-
ating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instruc-
tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
cle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system.This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 72
573
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get to
know your trailer. Acquaint yourself
with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the
vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly so respon-
sive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand.Then, to move the trail-
er to the left, just move your hand to
the left.To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have
someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
vers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 73
Driving your vehicle
745
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out.Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing
your signals when, in fact, they are
not. It’s important to check occasion-
ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working. You must also check the
lights every time you disconnect and
then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 45
mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trail-
er wiring harness could result
in damage to the vehicle electri-
cal system and/or personal
injury.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 74
575
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill.People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpected-
ly roll down hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
space.Turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb (right if headed
down hill, left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.
WARNING - Parking
on a hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached could
cause serious injury or death,
should the trailer break loose or
the brake stops working.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat.
If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves
across the dial towards “H”
(HOT), pull over and stop as
soon as it is safe to do so, and
allow the engine to idle until it
cools down.You may proceed
once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• Use caution when driving on
an uphill grade to reduce the
possibility of engine and
transaxle overheating.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 75
Driving your vehicle
765
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1.With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
WARNING - Parking
brake
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the parking
brake is not firmly set.
If you have left the engine run-
ning, the vehicle can move sud-
denly. You or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur in hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates over-
heating, switch off the A/C and
stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 76
577
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control.You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your car
during its first 1,200 miles (2,000
km) in order to allow the engine to
properly break in. Failure to heed
this caution may result in serious
engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further information on
additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 60 mph
(100 km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
Engine
Item
Gasoline Engine
2.0L Turbo GDI 2.4L GDI
Maximum trailer
weight
Ibs. (kg)
Without brake
System
1653
(750)
1653
(750)
With brake
System
Without trailer
package
2000
(907)
2000
(907)
With trailer
package
3500
(1588)
2800
(1270)
Maximum permissible static vertical load
on the coupling device
Ibs. (kg)
350
(159)
280
(127)
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 77
Driving your vehicle
785
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle.And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to correct them simply by moving
some items around in the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 78
579
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 79
Driving your vehicle
805
Vehicle capacity weight:
930 lbs. (420 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo.If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OAN053100
OAN053101
OAN053102
OAN053103
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
Tire and loading information label
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 80
581
Driving your vehicle
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
1653 lbs. (750 kg)
With trailer brakes:
2000 lbs. (907 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lb
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, the load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle.Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 81
Driving your vehicle
825
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions.The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 82
583
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pillar.
This label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehi-
cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go to
a weigh station and weigh your vehi-
cle.Your dealer can help you with this.
Be sure to spread out your load equal-
ly on both sides of the centerline.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle.If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage.You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle.Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either
the maximum front or rear
GAWR and vehicle capacity
weight. If you do, parts, includ-
ing tires on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles and
braking ability. This could
cause you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 83
Driving your vehicle
845
WARNING
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible
tire failure that could lead to a
crash.
• Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a
crash.
• A crash resulting from poor
handling vehicle damage, tire
failure, or increased stopping
distances could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle.Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restrained in your vehi-
cle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
• Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your war-
ranty. Do not overload your
vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 84
585
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.Properly
loading your vehicle will provide max-
imum return of the vehicle design
performance. Before loading your
vehicle, familiarize yourself with the
following terms for determining your
vehicle's weight ratings, with or with-
out a trailer, from the vehicle's speci-
fications and the compliance label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
AN HMA 5.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:21 Page 85
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
- Type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
• Low tire pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• TPMS malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
- Type B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Low tire pressure position telltale and tire
pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
• Use of temporary compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
• Jack Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
• Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
• Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 1
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
When you must make such an emer-
gency stop, always pull off the road
as far as possible.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
• To turn the hazard warning lights
off, push the switch again.
ODM042242
ODM042243
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 2
63
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the car slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do
not apply the brakes immediately
or attempt to pull off the road as
this may cause a loss of control.
When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers,
set the parking brake and put the
transaxle in P.
3. Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4.When repairing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in
this section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If
your vehicle will not start, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall, it is best if safe
to do so to wait at least 10 seconds to
restart a vehicle after it stalls. This
may reset the car so it will no longer
run at low power (limp home) condi-
tion.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 3
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light.If the light
dims or goes out when you oper-
ate the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4. Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, check all connectors at
ignition coils and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be discon-
nected or loose.
3. If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could result in a
collision or cause other dam-
age. In addition, push or pull
starting may cause the catalytic
converter to be overloaded and
create a fire hazard.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 4
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
technician or towing service jump
start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-volt
power supply (either two 12-volt
batteries in series or a 24-volt
motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The
battery produces hydrogen
gas which may explode if
exposed to flame or sparks.
If these instructions are not fol-
lowed exactly,serious personal
injury and damage to the vehi-
cle may occur! If you are not
sure how to follow this proce-
dure, seek qualified assis-
tance. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive. When jump starting, wear
protective glasses and be care-
ful not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the car.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
1VQA4001
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 5
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
✽✽
NOTICE
If the battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a battery
of another vehicle and two jumper
cables. Only use jumper cables with
fully insulated clamp handles.
To prevent personal injury or dam-
age to both vehicles, adhere strictly
to the following procedure.
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal on the booster
battery (2). Proceed to connect
one end of the other jumper cable
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other
end to a solid, stationary, metallic
point (for example, the engine lift-
ing bracket) away from the battery
(4).Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
Make sure that there is no contact
between the bodywork of the two
vehicles; otherwise, there is the
danger of short circuits.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery. If the first starting attempt
is not successful, wait a few min-
utes before making another
attempt in order to allow the dis-
charged battery to recharge.
To charge the discharged battery
enough, it is recommended to let the
engine at idle or to drive the vehicle
for a certain period of time.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative
terminal of the discharged bat-
tery. This can cause the dis-
charged battery to overheat and
crack, releasing battery acid.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 6
67
What to do in an emergency
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 7
What to do in an emergency
86
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P and set
the parking brake. If the air condi-
tioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the car or steam is coming
out from the hood, stop the
engine.Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant
leaking from the radiator, hoses or
under the car. (If the air condition-
ing had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop.)
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal.Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-
er for assistance.
WARNING
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the cool-
ing system and this should be
checked as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 8
69
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE A
(1) TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure indicator
(Shown on the LCD display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the recom-
mended pressure by the vehicle man-
ufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label.(If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
indicator when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure indicator illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure indicator.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly.The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure indicator. When the system
detects a malfunction, the indicator
will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will con-
tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-
ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehi-
cle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly.
ODM062002
■ Type A
■ Type B
OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 9
What to do in an emergency
106
Always check the TPMS malfunction
indicator after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS indicator does not illu-
minate for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion or engine is running, or if it
comes on after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, take your car to
your nearest authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure indicator
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated.
If the indicator illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances.You should check
your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure indicator
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired or replaced on the vehicle.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure indicator may
be illuminated if the tire pres-
sure was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a lowering of
tire pressure.
(Continued)
OANNDR2003/OANNDR2004
■ Type A ■ Type B
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 10
611
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under
inflation warning at the same time as
system failure then it will illuminate
the TPMS malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
public offices, broadcasting
stations, military installations,
airports, or transmitting tow-
ers, etc.This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may illuminate if snow
chains or some separately
purchased devices such as
notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navi-
gation etc. are used in the
vehicle.This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
(Continued)
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is higher or lower, you should
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 11
What to do in an emergency
126
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure indicator will come on.
Have the flat tire repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible or replace the flat tire
with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure indicator will blink or
remain on until the low pressure tire
is repaired and placed on the vehi-
cle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure indicator may blink or illu-
minate in 20 minutes after driving
because the TPMS sensor mounted
on the spare wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure indicator will turn off
within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not turned off after
a few minutes of driving, please visit
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
CAUTION
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire.The tire sealant not
approved by HYUNDAI may dam-
age the tire pressure sensor.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be elim-
inated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 12
613
What to do in an emergency
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
Do not use any tire sealant
except the Tire Mobility Kit
approved by HYUNDAI if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
The liquid sealant can damage
the tire pressure sensors.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 13
What to do in an emergency
146
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) - TYPE B
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
and tire pressure telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the information mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
utes later after driving.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message displays. After
driving, check the tire pressure.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User set-
tings mode” in chapter 4).
ODM062002
OAN064003/ODM064020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OAN064004/ODM064021L
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 14
615
What to do in an emergency
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to func-
tion properly.
WARNING
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle con-
trol resulting in an accident.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 15
What to do in an emergency
166
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the below happens, we rec-
ommend that the system be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator does
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to the ON or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale and tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning message dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel. If you cannot
reach a service station or if the tire
cannot hold the newly added air,
replace the low pressure tire with a
spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) after replacing the low
pressure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
OAN064003/ODM064020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 16
617
What to do in an emergency
✽✽
NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure position
telltale will not be displayed even
though the vehicle has an under-
inflated tire.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may
illuminate if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is higher or lower, you should
check the tire inflation pressure
and adjust the tires to the rec-
ommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 17
What to do in an emergency
186
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. We recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem.You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 10
minutes at speeds above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) after replacing the low
pressure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
You may not be able identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around elec-
tric power supply cables or
radios transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
snow chains are used or some
separate electronic devices
such as notebook computer,
mobile charger, remote starter
or navigation etc., are used in
the vehicle.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
CAUTION
NEVER use a puncture-repair-
ing agent to repair and/or inflate
a low pressure tire. The tire
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensor. If used, you
will have to replace the tire pres-
sure sensor.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 18
619
What to do in an emergency
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modify-
ing, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 19
What to do in an emergency
206
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE)
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to find these equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Socket
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire.The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for
assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle;never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
• The vehicle can roll off the
jack causing serious injury or
death. No person should
place any portion of their
body under a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack; use
vehicle support stands.
(Continued)
OANNDR2006
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 20
621
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).
2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and
remove the cover with coin or flat-
head screwdriver.
3. Connect the socket and wheel lug
nut wrench.
4. Loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
(Continued)
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
OANNDR2005
ODM062005
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 21
What to do in an emergency
226
5. After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth-
erwise the spare tire carrier may
be damaged.
6. Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3.Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
ODM062006 ODM062007
WARNING - Storing the
spare tire
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 22
623
What to do in an emergency
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
1VQA4022
1VQA4023
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 23
What to do in an emergency
246
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
ODM062008
ODM062009
ODM062010
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 24
625
What to do in an emergency
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
10.To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight.The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle.This may cause serious
injury or death.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 25
What to do in an emergency
266
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut.Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure.If it is too high, adjust it
until it is correct. Always reinstall the
valve cap after checking or adjusting
tire pressure. If the cap is not
replaced, air may leak from the tire.If
you lose a valve cap, buy another and
install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
ODM062011
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 26
627
What to do in an emergency
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of temporary
compact spare tire
If your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire, it will take up less
space than a regular-size tire.This tire
is smaller than a conventional tire and
is designed for temporary use only.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the temporary compact
spare is in use. The compact
spare should be replaced by
the proper conventional tire
and rim at the first opportunity.
• Do not drive a vehicle with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
WARNING
The temporary compact spare
tire is for emergency use only.
Do not operate your vehicle on
this compact spare at speeds
over 50 mph (80 km/h).The orig-
inal tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire
pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 27
What to do in an emergency
286
When using a temporary compact
spare tire, observe the following pre-
cautions:
• Under no circumstances should you
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); higher
speeds could damage the tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly enough
for the road conditions to avoid all
hazards.Any road hazard, such as a
pothole or debris, could seriously
damage the compact spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take the vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire.Because of the small-
er size, a tire chain will not fit proper-
ly. This could damage the vehicle
and result in loss of the chain.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life is
shorter than a regular tire. Inspect
your compact spare tire regularly
and replace worn compact spare
tires with the same size and design,
mounted on the same wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 28
629
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OTQ044219
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 29
What to do in an emergency
306
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to "Trailer towing" in chap-
ter 5.
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
On 2WD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OXM069028
dolly
A
B
C
CAUTION
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
OUN046030
OCM054034
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 30
631
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook
1. Open the talegate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service.
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
ODM062013
■ Rear
ODM062015
■ Rear
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 31
What to do in an emergency
326
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook attached to the front (or
under the rear) of the vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing the
vehicle. A driver must be in the vehi-
cle to steer it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing hook
and towing cable or chain.The
hook and towing cable or
chain may break and cause
serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle cannot
be moved,do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
a commercial tow truck serv-
ice for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 32
633
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing precautions
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it
can be towed only from the
front.Be sure that the transaxle
is in neutral. Be sure the steer-
ing is unlocked by placing the
ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion. A driver must be in the
towed vehicle to operate the
steering and brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transaxle, limit
the vehicle speed to 10 mph
(15 km/h) and drive less than 1
mile (1.5 km) when towing.
• Before towing, check under
your vehicle for leaking auto-
matic transaxle fluid. If the
automatic transaxle fluid is
leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
AN HMA 6.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:36 Page 33
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-44
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Front light replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
• Side repeater light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
• Rear combination light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-76
7
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 1
• High mounted stop light bulb replacement . . . . . . . 7-78
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 2
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
ODMEMC2001/ODMNMC2033
■■
Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
■■
Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.0L) - T-GDI
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 3
Maintenance
47
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has
factory-trained technicians and gen-
uine HYUNDAI parts to service your
vehicle properly. For expert advice
and quality service, see an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Owner’s Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of serv-
ice satisfaction.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 4
75
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems.This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
with special tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Owner’s Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, have it done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING -
Maintenance work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures. If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cooling
fans.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 5
Maintenance
67
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 6
77
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 7
Maintenance
87
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 150,000 miles (240,000
km) continue to follow the prescribed
maintenance intervals.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 8
79
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty.Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.Do not
mix other additives.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 9
Maintenance
107
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.Do not
mix other additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 10
711
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.Do not
mix other additives.
*
3
:Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
have been submerged in water.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 11
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
4
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
(Continued)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.Do not
mix other additives.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 12
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
adjust if necessary.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them.Do not
mix other additives.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 13
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
3
:Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
have been submerged in water.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 14
715
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 15
Maintenance
167
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - (2.4 GDI)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 16
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
3
:Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
have been submerged in water.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
4
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:24 PM Page 17
Maintenance
187
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and
adjust if necessary.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 18
719
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated - 2.0 TGDI)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 19
Maintenance
207
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of addi-
tive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safe-
ty matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless
of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
*
3
:Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they
have been submerged in water.
*
5
:The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or
6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after that, every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (2.4 GDI) *
6
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 60 months
after that, every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 20
721
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI-
TION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (2.4 GDI) R
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM)
OR 6 MONTHS
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, K, J
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (2.0 TGDI) R
EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM)
OR 3 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC /PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT,
UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 21
Maintenance
227
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-
ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in sandy areas
F-Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDI-
TION
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
6 MONTHS
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER
UNIT)
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
PROPELLER SHAFT I
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR
6 MONTHS
C, E
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 22
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
723
Maintenance
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 23
Maintenance
247
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner fil-
ter is recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if neces-
sary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer in accordance to
the scheduled maintenance at the
beginning of this chapter.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 24
725
Maintenance
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Brake pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor (if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle mal-
function and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 25
Maintenance
267
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil.
If you drop the engine oil on
the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
ODMEMC2003
OANNMC2003
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODMNMC2018
OANNMC2005
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 26
727
Maintenance
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
section.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects,
and reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as pos-
sible after handling used oil.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 27
Maintenance
287
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least
once a year, at the beginning of the
winter season, and before traveling
to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
(Continued)
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is if equipped
with GDI, the electric motor
(cooling fan) may operate until
you disconnect the negative
battery cable.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
(Continued)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 28
729
Maintenance
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
deonized water. Bring the level to F
(MAX), but do not overfill. If frequent
coolant refill is required, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An
improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
ODMNMC2021
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 29
Maintenance
307
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure causing serious
injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as generator.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
ODM072007
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 30
731
Maintenance
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
ODM072009
WARNING - Loss of
brake fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, the vehicle should be
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 31
Maintenance
327
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake fluid
should come in contact with
your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of
fresh tap water. Have your eyes
examined by a doctor as soon
as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Do not put in the wrong type of
fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 32
733
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 66 lb (30 kg,
294 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
ODMNMC2019
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
PARKING BRAKE
OCM050015
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 33
Maintenance
347
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Lift the air cleaner cover and pull
the air cleaner filter cover.
4. Pull the air cleaner to replace.
5. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
6. Verify that the air cleaner cover is
properly attached at all four corners
and sealing against air cleaner.
ODM072012
ODM072013 OXM073099
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 34
735
Maintenance
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part.
Use of nongenuine part could
damage the air flow sensor.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 35
Maintenance
367
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be care-
ful to avoid damaging other compo-
nents.
Replace the filter according to the
maintenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
2.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
ODM072014
ODM072015
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 36
737
Maintenance
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out both sides
of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
✽✽
NOTICE
Install a new climate control air fil-
ter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (
↓↓
) facing down-
wards.
Otherwise, the climate control
effects may decrease, possibly with a
noise.
OHG075041ODM072016
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 37
Maintenance
387
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
1JBA5122
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 38
739
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
1LDA5023
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 39
Maintenance
407
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the wiper blade.
OHM078062
OHM078063
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 40
741
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 min-
utes and get immediate
medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on
your skin, thoroughly
wash the contacted area.
If you feel a pain or a
burning sensation, get
medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be
harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
OANNMC209
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 41
Maintenance
427
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
• Always charge the battery
fully to prevent battery case
damage in low temperature
area.
• If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may dis-
charge. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 42
743
Maintenance
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
1.Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery
terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
(Continued)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 43
Maintenance
447
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold.“Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels”in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire under-
inflation
Severe underinflation (10 psi
(70 kPa) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
ODMNMC2017
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 44
745
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure.You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING - Tire
inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1 mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41
kPa). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 45
Maintenance
467
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement.If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the cen-
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire
pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure
to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems.They help prevent leaks
by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels”in section 8.
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly caus-
ing poor handling,loss of vehi-
cle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pres-
sure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the dri-
ver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every time
you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 46
747
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽✽
NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 47
Maintenance
487
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread.This shows there is
less than 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), to work irregularly.
WARNING - Replacing
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury.When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread,brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 48
749
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 49
Maintenance
507
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers
in the tire size designation mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
(P)235/65R17 102H
(P) - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; howev-
er, not all tires have this mark-
ing).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 50
751
Maintenance
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one.The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire.This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life
(TIN :Tire Identification
Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 51
Maintenance
527
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire.When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as
the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by not climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to a
loss of control and an accident
involving serious injury or death.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 52
753
Maintenance
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.The Grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard NO. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by the law.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 53
Maintenance
547
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800miles
(3,000km).
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 54
755
Maintenance
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transaxle
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight:This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 55
Maintenance
567
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device
made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and
steel or other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains the
gas or fluid that sustains the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over
5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the stan-
dard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight
or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear bars,"
that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs.(68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 56
757
Maintenance
All season tires
HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall.Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rat-
ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. if you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions.
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels as fol-
lows.
2WD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for a AWD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 57
Maintenance
587
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-
low is:Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
WARNING - Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with alu-
minum wheels. In unavoid-
able circumstance, use a wire
type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15mm) to prevent
damage to the chain’s con-
nection.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 58
759
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, the other in the engine compart-
ment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
Before replacing an open fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem.Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
✽✽
NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
OLM079051N
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 59
Maintenance
607
Inner panel fuse replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse
of the same rating from a circuit you
may not need for operating the vehi-
cle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.
ODM072017
OANNMC2030
CAUTION
• When replacing an open fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays
and terminals may be fas-
tened incompletely, and it may
cause a possible fire. If fuses,
relays and terminals fastened
with bolts or nuts are open,
consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system
malfunction.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 60
761
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always, put the mode switch at the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly.
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
ODM072019
CAUTION
Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving
the vehicle.
OANNMC2032
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 61
Maintenance
627
3. Check the removed fuse;replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the bolts shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
Authorized HYUNDAI Dealer.
OANNMC2033
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse box
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water leaking in.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 62
763
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describ-
ing fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
ODM072017
ODMNMC2014
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 63
Maintenance
647
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
A/BAG 10A SRS Control Module, A/C Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
MODULE 5 7.5A
Sunroof, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror,
Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
MODULE 1 7.5A
Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Console Switch LH/RH, Front Console Switch,
Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH
FOG LAMP RR 10A -
MEMORY 2 10A
BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver/Passenger Door Module,
Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster
SMART KEY 2 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
MODULE 3 10A
BCM, Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, A/C Control Module, Audio,
Driver/Passenger Door Module, ATM Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, AWD ECM,
Driver/Passenger Climate Control Seat Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module,
MTS Module, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Parking Assist
Sensor (Center) LH/RH, AMP
SMART KEY 4 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
INTERIOR LAMP 15A
Cargo Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Overhead Console Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Personal Lamp
LH/RH
MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, MTS Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Switch
MEMORY 1 10A RF Receiver, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 64
765
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
START 7.5A
W/O IMMO. & Smart Key : ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
With IMMO. or Smart Key : PCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Smart Key Control Module,
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay)
MODULE 2 10A
Crash Pad Switch, Multipurpose Check Connector, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH,
Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Stop Lamp Switch
CORNERING LAMP 10A -
SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof
S/HEATER RR 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
IGN 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 5, TCU)
A/CON 1 7.5A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer
WIPER RR 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch
SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
S/HEATER FRT 20A Driver/Passenger CCS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module
A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module
C/LIGHTER 20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter, Luggage Power Outlet
WIPER FRT 15A Multifunction Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper HI Relay, IG2 Relay)
BLOWER RR 20A -
P/WDW RH 25A Passenger Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch RH
RR HTD 10A A/C Control Module
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 65
Maintenance
667
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
SUNROOF 1 20A Sunroof
P/WDW LH 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module, Driver Door Module, Rear Power Window Switch LH
FUEL LID 15A Fuel Fillar Door Switch
SMART KEY 3 7.5A Smart Key Control Module
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
P/SEAT PASS 20A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
AMP 30A AMP
MODULE 4 10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, BCM, Overhead Console Lamp, AMP, MTS Module, Power Outside
Mirror Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Power Outlet Relay)
DR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay)
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver Lumbar Support Switch
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 66
767
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
ODM072050
ODMNMC2015
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 67
Maintenance
687
Relay NO. Relay Name Relay Type
E30 POWER OUTLET RELAY ISO MICRO
E31 START RELAY ISO MICRO
E32 FRONT DEICER RELAY ISO MICRO
E33 BLOWER RELAY ISO MICRO
E34 WIPER LO RELAY ISO MICRO
E36 ACC RELAY ISO MICRO
E37 IG1 RELAY ISO MICRO
E38 IG2 RELAY ISO MICRO
E39 COOLING FAN RELAY ISO MINI
E40 WIPER HI RELAY ISO MICRO
E41 REAR DEFOGGER RELAY ISO MICRO
E42 HORN RELAY ISO MICRO
E43 VACUUM PUMP RELAY ISO MICRO
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 68
769
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
MULTI
FUSE
MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
B+2 60A
Smart Junction Box (IPS 1 (4CH), IPS 2 (1CH), IPS 5 (1CH), Fuse - SUNROOF 1, P/SEAT
PASS, P/SEAT DRV)
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
RR HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay
ABS1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ESC Module
C/FAN 60A Cooling Fan Relay
B+3 60A
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - MODULE 1, SMART KEY 4, SUNROOF 2, SMART KEY 1, Leak
Current Autocut Device)
FUSE
B+4 50A
Smart Junction Box (IPS 3 (4CH), IPS 6 (2CH), Fuse - F/LID, STOP LAMP, DR LOCK, BRAKE
SWITCH)
EMS 40A EMS Box
IG1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - ACC Relay, IG1 Relay
IG2 40A Start Relay, IG2 Relay, W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch
TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet
B+1 50A Smart Junction Box (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, S/HEATER FRT, P/WDW RH, P/WDW LH)
HORN 15A Horn Relay
VACUUM PUMP 20A Vacuum Pump Relay
DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay
POWER OUTLET 25A Power Outlet Relay
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 69
Maintenance
707
Description Fuse rating Protected Component
FUSE
4WD 20A AWD ECM
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
AMS (WIPER) 10A BCM, PCM
WIPER FRT 25A Wiper LO Relay, Front Wiper Motor
B/UP LAMP 10A
M/T - Back-Up Lamp Switch, A/T - Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic
Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
ABS3 7.5A ESC Module
SENSOR5 7.5A PCM
TCU 15A A/T :Transaxle Range Switch, M/T : Fuse - B/UP LAMP (M/T)
F/PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay
ECU 1 15A PCM
ECU 2 10A -
SENSOR 3 10A Fuel Pump Relay, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2
IGN COIL 20A Condenser, Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4
SENSOR 2 10A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve(G4KJ), RCV Control Solenoid
Valve(G4KH),Crankshaft Position Sensor, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Canister Close Valve
SENSOR 1 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor(Down), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Cooling Fan Relay)
SENSOR 4 20A PCM
B/A HORN 10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 70
771
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
ing, headlamp and taillamp lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature differ-
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK”position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the head-
light assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 71
Maintenance
727
Headlamp, Front position
lamp, Front turn signal lamp,
Front fog lamp bulb replace-
ment
(1) Headlamp (High)
(2) Headlamp (Low)
(3) Front position lamp
(4) Front turn signal lamp/Front side
marker
(5) Front fog lamp (if equipped)
Headlamp bulb
ODM072029
ODMEMC2017
■ Type A
■ Type B
OHD076046
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
(Continued)
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 72
773
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3.Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
6.Inset a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always have the headlight aiming
adjusted after an accident or the
headlight assembly is reinstalled at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never
touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause
the bulb to overheat and burst
when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed
in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
ODMEMC2006
LL
LL
oo
oo
ww
ww
HH
HH
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 73
Maintenance
747
Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
1.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket
3. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
4. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
If the lamp bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
ONC075011
TT
TT
uu
uu
rr
rr
nn
nn
ss
ss
ii
ii
gg
gg
nn
nn
aa
aa
ll
ll
PP
PP
oo
oo
ss
ss
ii
ii
tt
tt
ii
ii
oo
oo
nn
nn
ll
ll
aa
aa
mm
mm
pp
pp
ODMEMC2008
SS
SS
ii
ii
dd
dd
ee
ee
mm
mm
aa
aa
rr
rr
kk
kk
ee
ee
rr
rr
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 74
775
Maintenance
Headlamp (HID type), position
(LED), turn signal, and front fog
lamp bulb replacement
If the lamp bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
A skilled technician should check or
repair the LED light. Otherwise, it
may damage related parts.
✽✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer to
last twice as long or longer than halo-
gen bulbs depending on their fre-
quency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point in
the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than typ-
ical use will shorten HID lamps life.
HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immedi-
ately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-
ing components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the lamp bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
A skilled technician should check or
repair the side repeater lamp.
Otherwise, it may damage related
parts (ex. outside mirror).
WARNING - HID
Headlamp low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized HYUNDAI Dealer.
ODM072031
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 75
Maintenance
767
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
(1) Rear stop and tail lamp
(2) Rear tail lamp
(3) Rear turn signal lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Rear side marker
Outside lamp
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).
2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-
ing please verify.
4.Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
ODM072033
ODMEMC2007
■ Type A
■ Type B
ODM072034
ODM072035
ODMEMC2010
■ Type A
■ Type B
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 76
777
Maintenance
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counter-
clockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket.
Pull the bulb out of the socket.(Side
marker : Remove the bulb from the
socket by pulling it out)
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Inside lamp
1. Open the liftgate (tailgate).
2. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
3.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
OANNMC2036
ODM072037
ODMEMC2011
■ Type A
■ Type B
Back-up lamp
Stop/tail lamp
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 77
Maintenance
787
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket. (Back-up lamp : Remove
the bulb from the socket by pulling
it out)
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
1.Open the liftgate (tailgate).
2.Gently remove the center cover of
the rear liftgate (tailgate) trim.
3.Disconnect the electrical connector.
4.Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
ODMEMC2018
ODMEMC2019
ODMEMC2022
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 78
779
Maintenance
5.Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6.Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
ODM072039
ODMEMC2021
B
A
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 79
Maintenance
807
Interior lamp bulb replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior
lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
■ Map lamp
OXM079044/ODM072041/ODM072043
■ Glove box lamp (if equipped)
■ Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
■ Sunvisor lamp
■ Room lamp
ODM072040/ODM072042/ODM072052
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 80
781
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted
surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap,chem-
ical detergents or hot water,
and do not wash the vehicle in
direct sunlight or when the
body of the vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 81
Maintenance
827
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
OJB037800
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 82
783
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 83
Maintenance
847
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads.This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while main-
taining a slow forward speed.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 84
785
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates an atmosphere that
both promotes and facilitates corro-
sion.For example, corrosion is accel-
erated by high humidity, particularly
when temperatures are just above
freezing. In such conditions, the cor-
rosive material is kept in contact with
the car surfaces by moisture that is
slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are poorly
ventilated against moisture disperal.
It is particularly important to keep
your car clean and free of mud or
accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion or
drastically limit by observing the fol-
lowing:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollu-
tion, or acid rain, etc., you should
take extra care to prevent corrosion.
In winter, spray or rinse the under-
side of your car at least once a
month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job;just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 85
Maintenance
867
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame mem-
bers, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape. If these areas are not kept
clear, moisture could become
trapped and accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp or
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your car in the garage or drive
it into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture can dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing, the attention of a
qualified body and paint shop is rec-
ommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in prop-
er containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from con-
tacting the dashboard because they
may cause damage or discoloration.
If they do contact the dashboard,
clean immediately. See the instruc-
tions that follow for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components
inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 86
787
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected.Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 87
Maintenance
887
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister.When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 88
789
Maintenance
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire.For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.Therefore,
if you smell exhaust fumes of any
kind inside your vehicle, have it
inspected and repaired immediately.
If you ever suspect exhaust fumes
are coming into your vehicle, drive it
only with all the windows fully open.
Have your vehicle checked and
repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 89
Maintenance
907
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running, adjust
the ventilation system (as needed)
to draw outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park, idle,
or drive the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such
as grass, vegetation, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 90
791
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 91
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle
Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
792
Maintenance
AN HMA 7.QXP 3/5/2015 3:25 PM Page 92
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Consumer information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Reporting safety defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 1
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
28
DIMENSIONS
*
1
with roof rack
Item in (mm)
Overall length 184.64 (4,690)
Overall width 74.01 (1,880)
Overall height 66.14 (1,680)/66.53 (1,690) *
1
Front tread
P235/65R17 64.29 (1,633)
235/60R18
64.09 (1,628)P235/55R19
235/55R19
Rear tread
P235/65R17 67.72 (1,644)
235/60R18
64.52 (1,639)P235/55R19
235/55R19
Wheelbase 106.29 (2,700)
Item
Gasoline
Theta II 2.0
Gasoline
Theta II 2.4
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
121.92
(1,998)
143.95
(2,359)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.38X3.38
(86x86)
3.46X3.81
(88x97)
Firing order
1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
4. In-line 4. In-line
ENGINE
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 2
83
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE
Lamp Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
Headlamp (Low) 55 or 35 (HID)* H7L or D3S
Headlamp (High) 55 H7L
Front turn signal lamp 28 PY28W
Front position lamp 5 or LED* W5W or LED
Front fog lamp* 35 H8
Side repeater lamp (Outside mirror)* LED* LED
Front side marker lamp 5 W5W
Rear
Rear Stop/Tail lamp (Outside) 28 or 8, LED* P28 or W8W, LED
Tail lamp (Inside) 8, LED* W8W, LED
Rear turn signal lamp 27 PY27W
Back-up lamp 16 W16W
Rear side marker lamp LED* LED
High mounted stop lamp LED* LED
License plate lamp 5 W5W
Interior
Map lamp 10 FESTOON
Room lamp 8 FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamp 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
* If equipped
* HID : High Intensity Discharge
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 3
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
48
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure [psi (kPa)]
Wheel lug nut torque
lb•ft, N•m (kg•m)
Normal load
()
Maximum load
()
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
P235/65R17 7.0J×17
34
(235)
34
(235)
34
(235)
34
(235)
65~79, 88~107
(9~11)
235/60R18 7.5J×18
P235/55R19 7.5J×19
235/55R19 7.5J×19
Compact spare tire T165/90D17 4.0T×17
60
(420)
60
(420)
60
(420)
60
(420)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 4
85
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item 5 Seater
SAE
1 Seat
71.5 cu f (2,025 l)
2 Seat
35.4 cu f (1,003 l)
Item
Gasoline Theta II 2.0 T-GDI Gasoline Theta II 2.4 GDI
2WD AWD 2WD AWD
Automatic transaxle
4,960 lbs. (2,250 kg)/
5,181 lbs. (2,350 kg) *
1
5,181 lbs. (2,350 kg) 4,850 lbs. (2,200 kg) 5,071 lbs. (2,300 kg)
*
1
with R19 tire
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant
FRONT A/CON
600 ± 25g
R-134a
FRONT + REAR A/CON
750 ± 25g
Compressor lubricant
FRONT A/CON
120 ± 10g
PAG (FD46XG)
FRONT + REAR A/CON
210 ± 10g
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 5
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
68
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
T-GDI
5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)
HYUNDAI approved engine oil
ACEA A5 (or above)
Theta II 2.4
GDI
5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)
API Service SM *
3
,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 (or above)
Automatic transaxle fluid
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV,
SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV or other brands
meeting the above specification approved by
Hyundai Motor Co..
Theta II 2.4
7.50 US qt. (7.1 l)
Coolant
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
10.24 US qt. (9.7 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
radiator)
Theta II 2.4
7.50 ~ 7.51 US qt.
(7.1 ~7.4 l)
Brake fluid
0.74~0.85 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 6
87
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econo-
my by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in
everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Rear differential oil (AWD)
0.56 US qt. (0.53 l)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (AWD)
Theta II
2.0 / 2.4
0.63US qt. (0.6 l)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
Fuel
17.43 US gal. (66 l)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 7
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity engine
oils are required for satisfactory lubri-
cation in hot weather. Using oils of any
viscosity other than those recommend-
ed could result in engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle will
be operated in before the next oil
change.Proceed to select the recom-
mended oil viscosity from the chart.
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before check-
ing or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4).However,
if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Theta ll 2.0
T-GDI
Gasoline
Engine
Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Theta ll 2.4
GDI
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 8
89
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the
engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
ODMEVS2002
Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OEN086004N
VIN label
OCM056002
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
108
REFRIGERANT LABEL
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The refrigerant label is located at the
front of the engine room.
The label contains the following infor-
mation:
• Type of refrigerant
• Amount of refrigerant
ODMNMC2016
ODMNMC2017
OCM080003
■ Gasoline engine (2.0 / 2.4L)
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 10
811
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been
prepared in accordance with regula-
tions issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
Your Hyundai dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
Hyundai motor vehicles are
designed and manufactured to meet
or exceed all applicable safety stan-
dards.
For your safety, however, we strongly
urge you to read and follow all direc-
tions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the head-
ings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and
"WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you
have any questions regarding the
operation of your vehicle, please
contact your nearest Hyundai Motor
America Regional Office as listed in
the following:
Eastern Region: Connecticut,
Delaware, Maine, Massachusetts,
New Hampshire, New Jersey, New
York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia,
North Carolina, South Carolina,
Virginia, and West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama,
Arkansas, Louisiana, Mississippi,
New Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee,
Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road,
Suite 400 Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana,
lowa, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota,
Nebraska, North Dakota, South
Dakota, Ohio, Wisconsin, Kansas,
Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii,
Arizona, California, Colorado, ldaho,
Montana, Nevada, Oregon, Utah,
Washington, Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley,
California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 11
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
128
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA.If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Buliding Washington, DC 20590 You
can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
AN HMA 8.QXP 2015-02-03 ¿ ¨˜ 1:55 Page 12
Index
I
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 1
Index
2
I
A/V Mode ......................................................................4-90
Active ECO ....................................................................5-57
Air bag collision sensors ................................................3-64
Air bag inflation conditions............................................3-65
Air bag non-inflation conditions ....................................3-67
Air bag warning label ....................................................3-71
Air bag warning light......................................................3-46
Air bags ..........................................................................3-43
Air bag collision sensors ............................................3-64
Air bag inflation conditions ........................................3-65
Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................3-67
Air bag warning label..................................................3-71
Air bag warning light ..................................................3-46
Curtain air bag ............................................................3-62
Driver's front air bag ..................................................3-56
Occupant classification system ..................................3-50
Operation ....................................................................3-44
Passenger's front air bag..............................................3-56
Side impact air bag......................................................3-61
SRS components and functions ..................................3-46
Air cleaner ......................................................................7-34
Air ventilation seat..........................................................3-13
All wheel drive (AWD) ..................................................5-21
Antenna ........................................................................4-169
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-32
Appearance care..............................................................7-81
Exterior care ................................................................7-81
Interior care ................................................................7-86
Armrest (Rear seat) ........................................................3-17
Audio remote control....................................................4-170
Audio system ................................................................4-169
Antenna......................................................................4-169
Audio remote control ................................................4-170
AUTO light position ....................................................4-123
Automatic climate control system ................................4-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning....................4-146
Manual heating and air conditioning ........................4-147
Automatic transaxle ........................................................5-14
Shift-lock override ......................................................5-18
Sports mode ................................................................5-17
Automatic turn off function..........................................4-130
Aux, USB and iPod
®
....................................................4-163
Battery ............................................................................7-41
Battery saver function ..................................................4-120
Before driving ..................................................................5-3
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) ..............................5-50
Blue Link
®
center ..........................................................4-60
Bottle holder, see Cup holder ......................................4-159
A
B
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 2
I
3
Index
Brake system ..................................................................5-28
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................5-32
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) ..................................5-40
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)..............................5-35
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) ..................................5-42
Parking brake ..............................................................5-30
Power brakes ..............................................................5-28
Vehicle stability management (VSM) ........................5-39
Brakes fluid ....................................................................7-31
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-71
Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see Engine start/stop button ................5-9
California perchlorate notice ..........................................7-92
Camera (Rear view) ......................................................4-118
Capacities (Lubricants) ....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care ................................................................7-81
Interior care ................................................................7-86
Tire care ......................................................................7-44
Care of seat belts ............................................................3-33
Cargo security screen....................................................4-164
Center console storage..................................................4-156
Central door lock switch ................................................4-23
Certification label ............................................................8-9
Chains, See Tire chains ..................................................5-67
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-45
Child restraint system ....................................................3-34
Lower anchor system ..................................................3-41
Tether anchor system ..................................................3-39
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................4-25
Climate control air filter......................................4-143, 7-36
Clothes hanger ..............................................................4-162
Combined instrument, see Instrument cluster ................4-79
Compact spare tire ..........................................................6-27
Consumer information ....................................................8-11
Coolant............................................................................7-28
Cooling fluid, see Engine coolant ..................................7-28
Crankcase emission control system................................7-88
Cruise control switch ......................................................5-46
Cruise control system ....................................................5-45
Cruise control switch ..................................................5-46
Cup holder ....................................................................4-159
Curtain air bag ................................................................3-62
Dashboard illumination,
see Instrument cluster illumination ............................4-80
Dashboard, see Instrument cluster..................................4-79
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................4-60
Daytime running light ..................................................4-123
Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-153
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................4-134
C
D
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 3
Index
4
I
Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-153
Dimensions ......................................................................8-2
Display illumination,
see Instrument cluster illumination ............................4-80
Displays, see Instrument cluster ....................................4-79
Door locks ......................................................................4-21
Central door lock switch ............................................4-23
Child-protector rear door lock ....................................4-25
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) ....................................5-40
Drinks holders, see Cup holders ..................................4-159
Driver position memory system ......................................3-8
Driver selectable steering mode ....................................4-57
Driver's front air bag ......................................................3-56
Driving at night ..............................................................5-62
Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-64
Driving in the rain ..........................................................5-63
Driving off-road..............................................................5-64
Economical operation ....................................................5-58
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) ....................................4-61
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with compass..............4-61
Electric Power Steering (EPS)........................................4-54
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................5-35
Emergency fuel filler door release..................................4-47
Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Jump starting ................................................................6-5
Emergency tailgate safety release ..................................4-36
Emergency while driving..................................................6-3
Emission control system ................................................7-88
Crankcase emission control system ............................7-88
Evaporative emission control system..........................7-88
Exhaust emission control system ................................7-89
Engine ..............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment ........................................................2-7
Engine compartment panel fuse ............................7-61, 7-67
Engine coolant ................................................................7-28
Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................4-82
Engine number................................................................8-10
Engine oil........................................................................7-26
Engine overheats ..............................................................6-8
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9
Engine will not start..........................................................6-4
Evaporative emission control system ............................7-88
Exhaust emission control system....................................7-89
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................7-23
Exterior care....................................................................7-81
Exterior overview (front)..................................................2-2
Exterior overview (rear) ..................................................2-3
Flat tire (with spare tire) ................................................6-20
Changing tires..............................................................6-23
Compact spare tire ......................................................6-27
E
F
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 4
I
5
Index
Jack and tools ..............................................................6-20
Jack label ....................................................................6-29
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-21
Floor mat anchor(s) ......................................................4-162
Fluid
Brakes fluid ................................................................7-31
Washer fluid ................................................................7-33
Folding Key ......................................................................4-4
Folding the rear seat ......................................................3-18
Front fog light ..............................................................4-125
Front seat adjustment - Manual ........................................3-5
Front seat adjustment - Power ..........................................3-6
Fuel Economy ..............................................................4-100
Fuel filler door ................................................................4-44
Emergency fuel filler door release ..............................4-47
Fuel Gauge......................................................................4-82
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3
Fuse switch ....................................................................7-61
Fuse/relay panel description ..........................................7-63
Fuses ..............................................................................7-59
Engine compartment panel fuse ........................7-61, 7-67
Fuse switch ..................................................................7-61
Fuse/relay panel description........................................7-63
Instrument panel fuse ..................................................7-60
Multi fuse ....................................................................7-62
Gauges ............................................................................4-81
Glove box......................................................................4-156
Good braking practices ..................................................5-43
Good driving practices....................................................5-19
Gross vehicle weight ........................................................8-5
Hazard warning flasher ................................................4-119
Hazardous driving conditions ........................................5-60
Headlamp welcome ......................................................4-133
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function ........................4-120
Headlight bulb replacement............................................7-71
Headlight position ........................................................4-122
Headrest (Front)................................................................3-9
Headrest (Rear) ..............................................................3-15
Heated steering wheel ....................................................4-54
Height adjustment (Front) ..............................................3-25
High beam operation ....................................................4-123
Highway driving ............................................................5-64
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC)......................................5-42
Hood................................................................................4-42
Horn ................................................................................4-56
How to use this manual ....................................................1-2
G
H
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 5
Index
6
I
Immobilizer system ................................................4-7, 4-14
Indicator light................................................................4-110
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................4-60
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-79
Gauges ........................................................................4-81
Instrument cluster illumination ..................................4-80
LCD Display Control ..................................................4-80
Transaxle Shift Indicator ............................................4-84
Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-60
Instrument panel overview ..............................................2-6
Interior care ....................................................................7-86
Interior features ............................................................4-159
Aux, USB and iPod
®
................................................4-163
Cargo security screen ................................................4-164
Clothes hanger ..........................................................4-162
Cup holder ................................................................4-159
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................4-162
Luggage net (holder) ................................................4-163
Power outlet ..............................................................4-160
Side curtain................................................................4-166
Sunvisor ....................................................................4-160
Interior light ..................................................................4-130
Automatic turn off function ......................................4-130
Luggage room lamp ..................................................4-132
Map lamp ..................................................................4-130
Room lamp ................................................................4-131
Vanity mirror lamp ....................................................4-132
Interior light welcome ..................................................4-133
Interior overview ..............................................................2-4
Jack and tools..................................................................6-20
Jump starting ....................................................................6-5
Key positions ....................................................................5-6
Keys
Folding key....................................................................4-4
Immobilizer system..............................................4-7, 4-14
Smart key ....................................................................4-10
Label
Air bag warning label..................................................3-71
Refrigerant label ..........................................................8-10
Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-50
Tire specification and pressure label ..........................8-10
Vehicle certification label..............................................8-9
LCD display....................................................................4-85
A/V Mode....................................................................4-90
LCD modes..................................................................4-85
I
K
J
L
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 6
I
7
Index
Service Mode ..............................................................4-86
Turn By Turn Mode ....................................................4-90
User Settings Mode ....................................................4-87
Warning Messages ......................................................4-91
LCD Display Control......................................................4-80
LCD modes ....................................................................4-85
Liftgate (Tailgate) ..........................................................4-26
Light bulbs ......................................................................7-71
Lighting ........................................................................4-120
Auto light position ....................................................4-122
Battery saver function ..............................................4-120
Daytime running light ..............................................4-123
Front fog light............................................................4-125
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function ......................4-120
Headlight position ....................................................4-122
High beam operation ................................................4-123
Parking light position ................................................4-121
Turn signals ..............................................................4-124
Low aspect ratio tire ......................................................7-54
Lower anchor system......................................................3-41
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6
Luggage net (holder) ....................................................4-163
Luggage room lamp......................................................4-132
Luggage tray ................................................................4-158
Luggage volume ..............................................................8-5
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-23
Maintenance services ....................................................7-4
Owner maintenance ......................................................7-6
Scheduled maintenance service ....................................7-7
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
Maintenance schedule ......................................................7-7
Maintenance services........................................................7-4
Manual climate control system ....................................4-135
Air conditioning ........................................................4-141
Climate control air filter............................................4-143
Heating and air conditioning ....................................4-136
Map lamp ......................................................................4-130
Mirrors ............................................................................4-60
Blind Zone Mirror (BZM) ..........................................4-78
Blue Link
®
center........................................................4-60
Day/night rearview mirror ..........................................4-60
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) ................................4-61
Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with compass ..........4-61
Inside rearview mirror ................................................4-60
Outside rearview mirror ..............................................4-76
Programming HomeLink
®
..........................................4-65
Moonroof, see Panoramic sunroof..................................4-48
Multi box ......................................................................4-157
Multi fuse........................................................................7-61
M
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 7
Index
8
I
Occupant classification system ......................................3-50
Odometer ........................................................................4-83
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-26
Outside rearview mirror..................................................4-76
Outside Temperature Gauge ..........................................4-83
Overheats ..........................................................................6-8
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-6
Panoramic sunroof ..........................................................4-48
Parking brake ........................................................5-30, 7-33
Parking light position....................................................4-121
Passenger's front air bag ................................................3-56
Power brakes ..................................................................5-28
Power outlet ..................................................................4-160
Power steering ................................................................4-54
Power window lock button ............................................4-40
Pre-tensioner seat belt ....................................................3-27
Programming HomeLink
®
..............................................4-65
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp ......................................4-133
Rear parking assist system............................................4-115
Rear seat adjustment ......................................................3-14
Rearview camera ..........................................................4-118
Rear window wiper and washer ..................................4-129
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-44
Recommended lubricants and capacities..........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number..........................8-8
Reducing the risk of a rollover ......................................5-60
Refrigerant label ............................................................8-10
Replacement light bulb ..................................................7-71
Reporting safety defects ................................................8-12
Road warning....................................................................6-2
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-61
Roof rack ......................................................................4-167
Room lamp....................................................................4-131
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-46
Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-7
Seat belt precautions ......................................................3-30
Seat belt warning ............................................................3-23
Seat belts ........................................................................3-22
Care of seat belts ........................................................3-33
Height adjustment (Front) ..........................................3-25
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................3-27
Seat belt precautions....................................................3-30
Seat belt warning ........................................................3-23
Seat warmer (Front) ........................................................3-11
Seat warmer (Rear) ........................................................3-17
O
P
R
S
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 8
I
9
Index
Seatback pocket ..............................................................3-13
Seats ..................................................................................3-2
Air ventilation seat ......................................................3-13
Armrest (Rear seat) ....................................................3-17
Driver position memory system ....................................3-8
Folding the rear seat ....................................................3-18
Front seat adjustment - Manual ....................................3-5
Front seat adjustment - Power ......................................3-6
Headrest (Front) ............................................................3-9
Headrest (Rear)............................................................3-15
Rear seat adjustment....................................................3-14
Seat warmer (Front) ....................................................3-11
Seat warmer (Rear)......................................................3-17
Seatback pocket ..........................................................3-13
Service Mode ..................................................................4-86
Shift-lock override ..........................................................5-18
Side curtain ..................................................................4-166
Side impact air bag ........................................................3-61
Smart key ........................................................................4-10
Smooth cornering............................................................5-62
Snow tires ......................................................................5-66
Spare tire
Changing tires..............................................................6-23
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-21
Special driving conditions ..............................................5-60
Driving at night ..........................................................5-62
Driving in flooded areas..............................................5-64
Driving in the rain ......................................................5-63
Driving off-road ..........................................................5-64
Hazardous driving conditions......................................5-60
Highway driving..........................................................5-64
Reducing the risk of a rollover....................................5-60
Rocking the vehicle ....................................................5-61
Smooth cornering ........................................................5-62
Speedometer....................................................................4-81
Sports mode ....................................................................5-17
SRS components and functions ......................................3-46
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4
Steering wheel ................................................................4-54
Driver selectable steering mode ..................................4-57
Electric Power Steering (EPS) ....................................4-54
Heated steering wheel ................................................4-56
Horn ............................................................................4-56
Power steering ............................................................4-54
Tilt steering..................................................................4-55
Storage compartment ....................................................4-156
Center console storage ..............................................4-156
Glove box ..................................................................4-156
Luggage tray..............................................................4-158
Multi box ..................................................................4-157
Sunglass holder..........................................................4-157
Sunglass holder ............................................................4-157
Sunroof, see Panoramic sunroof ....................................4-48
Sunvisor ........................................................................4-160
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 9
Tachometer......................................................................4-81
Tether anchor system ......................................................3-39
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-17
Tilt steering ....................................................................4-55
Tire chains ......................................................................5-67
Tire maintenance ............................................................7-50
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..............6-9, 6-14
Tire replacement ............................................................7-48
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-46
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-50
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-10
Tire traction ....................................................................7-49
Tires and wheels......................................................7-44, 8-4
Checking tire inflation pressure ..................................7-45
Low aspect ratio tire....................................................7-54
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ................7-44
Tire care ......................................................................7-44
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-50
Tire replacement ..........................................................7-48
Tire rotation ................................................................7-46
Tire sidewall labeling ..................................................7-50
Tire traction ................................................................7-49
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-47
Wheel replacement ......................................................7-49
Towing ............................................................................6-30
Towing hook................................................................6-31
Towing hook ..................................................................6-31
Trailer towing..................................................................5-71
Transaxle Shift Indicator ................................................4-84
Trip A/B ..........................................................................4-99
Trip computer..................................................................4-98
Fuel Economy............................................................4-100
Trip A/B ......................................................................4-99
Turn By Turn Mode ........................................................4-90
Turn signals ..................................................................4-124
User Settings Mode ........................................................4-87
Vanity mirror lamp........................................................4-132
Vehicle break-in process ..................................................1-5
Vehicle certification label ................................................8-9
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders..............1-6
Vehicle handling instructions............................................1-5
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..............................8-9
Vehicle load limit............................................................5-80
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)............................5-39
Vehicle weight ................................................................5-85
I
10
Index
V
T
U
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 10
I
11
Index
Warning light ................................................................4-102
Warning Messages ..........................................................4-91
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-33
Welcome system ..........................................................4-133
Headlamp welcome ..................................................4-133
Interior light welcome ..............................................4-133
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp ..................................4-133
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-47
Wheel replacement ........................................................7-49
Windows ........................................................................4-37
Power window lock button..........................................4-40
Windshield defrosting and defogging ..........................4-153
Windshield washers (Front)..........................................4-128
Windshield wipers (Front) ............................................4-126
Winter driving ................................................................5-66
Snow tires ....................................................................5-66
Tire chains ..................................................................5-67
Wiper blades ..................................................................7-38
Wipers and washers ......................................................4-126
Rear window wiper and washer ................................4-129
Windshield washers (Front) ......................................4-128
Windshield wipers (Front) ........................................4-126
W
AN HMA INDEX.QXP 3/3/2015 11:36 AM Page 11
